4^67 ^669 fyxmll Hmrmitg Jibwg BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME FROM THE SAGE; ENDOWMENT FUND THE GIFT OF 1891 .j.i.ttpjr ; zi^ 1^ fSPW r AUG 3 1 1943 OCT 101950^ OCT 16 1954 HZ JUL 2 7 ij55W^ NOV 2 8 1955 B R rY C^ ^^ 8)956 a P The original of tliis bool< is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924026836381 PORTA LINGUARUM OMENTA HUM IN0HOA.VIT J. H. PETEEMANN CONTINUAVIT HERM. L. STRACK. BLEMENTA LINGUARUM HEBBAICAE, PHOENICIAE, BIBLICO-AEAMAICAE, TAEGtJMICAE, SAMAEITANAE, SYEIACAB, AEABICAB, ABTHIOPICAE, ASSXEIACAE, AEG-TPTIACAE, COPTICAE, AEMBNIACAE, PEESICAB, TtJECICAE, ALIAEUM STUUnS ACADBMICIS ACCOMMODAYBRONT J. H. PBTBRMANN, H. L. STKACK, E. NESTLE, A. SOCIN, F. PEAETOEIUS, AD. MBEX, AUG. MUBLLEE, PEIEDE. DELITZSCH, C. SALBMANN, W. SHXJKOWSKI, TH. NOELDBKB, G. JACOB, alii. PAES I. HEBREW GRAMMAR BY H. L. STRAOK. SECOND ENLARGED EDITION. BERLIN, H. EEUTHEE'S VEELAGSBUCHHANDLUNG. LONDON NEW YOEK ■WILIilAMS & NOEGATB B. ■WESTERMAKN & Co. 14, HENRIETTA STREET, 888, BEOADWAT. COVENT GABDEK, 1889. HEBREW GRAMMAR WITH READING BOOK, EXERCISES, LITERATURE AND VOCABULARIES eM^. HERMANN L. STEAOK TBANSLATED EEOM THE GEEMAN AECH". E. B. KENNEDY, B. D,, PEOP. or ORIENTAL LANQtTAQES, UNIV. OF ABERDEEN. SECOND ENIiAJBGBD EDITION. BEELIN, H. EEUTHEE'S VEELAGSBUCHHANDLTJNG. LONDON, NEW YORK, WILLIAMS & NOEQATE B. WESTBEMANN & Co 14, HEKniETTA STEEBT, 83g^ BSOADWAT. COVENT OABDBH. 1889. s .cV All rights reserved. From the Preface to the first (Grerman) Edition. The superabundance of Hebrew grammars which perhaps already exists is not increased by the present work; it takes the place of the grammar of J. H. Peter mann (1845 and — simply with new title — 1864) which is now no longer in the market. It has been occasioned by a want which has been strongly felt by me for a considerable time. Por the initiatory studies of the yearly increasing number of such as begin Hebrew at the university, the otherwise serviceable grammars at present in use are too extensive, besides being either too elementary or too difficult for beginners. Now since the whole of the accidence must, for obvious reasons, be gone over in at most one term, I found myself compelled to occupy the greater part of the time with dictating. Since, however, a new alphabet had to be learned at the same time, this method was attended with serious inconveniences, and the necessity of a printed compendium became every day more apparent. May the book which is now offered to the public as the result of many years' experience as a teacher prove useful to others besides my own students! As already remarked, I have written in the first place for students wishing to prepare themselves in the shortest possible time for attendance on the easier exegetical lecturer VI in the university and for the use of more extensive works on the Hebrew language. I feel justified, however, in hoping that my work [particularly since it has been materially enlarged in the second edition] ' will be found suitable for use in schools, since it discusses only the most important points, these, however, fully and clearly. Irregular forms not mentioned here may be explained by the teacher or looked up in the "Analytical Appendix" of the lexicons. That in a few places* more is offered than is found even in most of the larger grammars will not disturb the beginner, and will be welcomed by not a few other readers. The present work differs more or less from the Hebrew grammars known to me in the following points: The vocabulary, with the exception of the exercises in reading, is taken as far as possible from Genesis and Psalms. All the Hebrew [forms in the grammar and in the exercises really occur in the Bible; none have been con- structed by the author.** Such hypothetical forms as are adduced simply to explain the genesis of existing forms, and formations that are warned against will in all cases be found transcribed in italics: only too easily does the learner retain precisely that form which he must not use when it is presented to him in Hebrew characters along with other forms.*** * §§7;25/'.5'.S;28O;31c;60A:;64;65i;67;70;72;[84(i;88;90]. ** The unavoidable exceptions are: the forms of iap, certain forms of tip in § 71, the paradigms p. 40f., p. 2*£f. [and a few others which are pointed out as they occur], *** "isn^nn, -na, r^'ra, T^ns;, hbp bs, iTiii!T;3, -ims, "-bn!? and similar monstrosities will be looked for in vain. How the genesis of !Tiiinia, "liass, "^brt is to be made clear to beginners with Hebrew types is shown in §11^.^ VII The object of the arrangement adopted in the paradigms of the weak verbs, which differs from that usually followed, is to render a mechanical learning by rote impossible. It should also be borne in mind that all "complete paradigms" contain forms that can be justified by no certain analogy, [Should the teacher desire to complete any paradigm he may profitably allow this to be done by the students themselves.] It is a matter of experience that for years the study of Hebrew is no pleasure to many from the fact that they have not, at the very outset, overcome the difficulties in- herent in the reading of unfamiliar characters. To remove these difficulties is the aim of the carefully arranged exercises in reading. In the exercises for translation so much matter has been condensed into a few pages that whoever has thoroughly mastered the whole is sufficiently prepared to read the easier sections of the Old Testament, and is no longer in need of a reading-book. [Cf. also p. VIII.] I acknowledge with pleasure the assistance I have derived in my studies from the books cited on p. 11* ff. The following pages however are, directly or indirectly, almost exclusively the product of my own experience as an instructor. Should they contribute in some degree to a .better preparation for the study of the word of God, as contained in the Old Testament scriptures, I shall, consider myself richly rewarded for the pains bestowed upon them. ■ Berlin W., May 6, 1883, H. L. Strack, vm Preface to the second ((jerman) Edition. The exceedingly kind reception which my book has met with on the part of both teachers and students*, has served as an incentive to bring it, so far as the shortness of the time permitted, nearer what it aims to be, viz: a short yet scientific grammar of the Hebrew language for beginners. Apart from quite a number of minor additions and the short §§ 40 and 77, there has been added: first, almost the whole of the syntactical matter, that is not only §§ 81 — 91 but the bulk of the syntactical remarks in §§ 17 — 19. 21. ^9. 41 f. 46 f. 63 f. The introduction of a part of the syntax into the chapter on the forms seemed to me to be justified by a regard for the practical work of instruction (§ 39 numerals!), and with reference to the space saved. Secondly, § 12 which treats of the syllable and in which the remarks on opened and loosely shut syllables should be carefully noted. Thirdly, the exercises for translation have been enlarged by the addition of a number of sentences, which I have preferred to take from Proverbs in order to give the student at least some acquaintance with the gnomic wisdom of the Old Test- ament. The wish to have connected pieces for reading and translation I have sought to comply with by adding for six extracts (I Sam. 9. 25; I Zings 3; Psalms 121. 127. 130) such explanatory notes as will enable the student to read * An authorised translation appeared nine months ago in Danish under the title: Sebraisk Grammatik. I. Sebraisk Form- losre af H. L. Strack, oversat af H. Kissmeyer; 11. Hebraisk Syntax af Fr. Buhl Kjebenhavn 1885. Gyldendal. IX them with the help of the appended vocabulary. In this connection it may be observed that the student who has mastered this little grammar, will be able, even without a dictionary, to read a considerable part of Grenesis with but little assistance from the instructor. I have to thank Professor 8. E. Driver of Oxford (whose excellent work on the use of the tenees has been of special service to me for §§ 88 and 91) for detailed information on the recent literature in English. For pages 2*— 19* I have preferred Latin to English in order that the type may serve both for the German and for the English edition. Berhn, August 15, 1885. H. L. Strack. PEEP ACE TO THE SECOND ENGLISH EDITION. In compliance with requests made to me from various quarters I have prepared as a complement to my Hebrew Grammar Exercises for translation into the Hebrew language. In order to inspire the student with a greater interest in his work I have taken special pains to furnish him at as early a stage as possible with sentences for translation, in addition to the bare grammatical forms. These "Exercises", like the Grammar, are so arranged that the student may begin with the Noun or vpith the Verb, or may take them together, if he so choose. If he elects to follow the first of the three alternatives just given, he will take the exercises in order, passing over, meanwiiile, those sentences in which verbal- forms occur,-^indicated by their position at the end and by two, parallel. bars. In the second case, the student, after finishing No. A, may turn at once to the verbal forms in Nos. 24 — 30. In the third case he will have to master-^ before No. 5, the Perf. Qal (also the forms in No. 24), before No. 9, the whole of the ,Qal (of. Nos. 25. 26), before Np.lO, Niph'al, Pi'el, Pu'al (cf. Nos. 27. 28), before No. 21, Hiph'il, Hoph'al, Hithpa'el (cf. Nos. 29. 30). By far the greater number of the" sentences are taken either verbatim,': or with such modifications as the plan of the work required, from the Old Testament. Those who have had experience in such matters know that the making of such a selection is more difficult than to make up sentences for one's self — a task in which only too many have come to grief. To render these exercises available also for those who use the well known grammars of Gesenius-Kautzsch (English edition by Dr. E.C.Mitchell 1880) and of Prof. A.B. Davidson I have added the Qorresponding sections of these grammars at the beginning of each exercise. Since it is desirable that beginners should be furnished with a larger number of connected passages for translation than is, as yet, to be found in the chrestomathy at the end of the Grammar, I have added in the shape of an appendix such explanatory notes as seem to me necessary for the study of Gen. 1—3, and Psalms 1—3. With the help of these the student will be independent of larger works) as it will be sufficient for him to consult the vpcabulary appended to the Grammar. Should a new edition df the latter be called for, XI the notes here given will be joined to those I have already given pp. 47* — 50*. May these pages likewise contribute to a better pre- paration for the study of the word of God, as contained in the Old Testament scriptures. Gross-Lichterfelde hear Berlin, Pentecost, 1889. H. L. Strack. . NB. S, e, denote vowels long by nature or by contraction ; a, e, tone-long vowels; i and it stand for every long i and m. The position of tbe tone is indicated by ^, e.g. Sina;' pausal forms by — . Where no book is named, the quotation is from Genesis, Forms occurring only once are accompanied by fi numbers in parentheses indicate how often a form occurs, e, g. §17e: ai'siiB (8). "(21)" and "(3 J)" signify that a word jnay be explained in two or three ways. 'n=nilni (§96). || G=Genesi3. || ij;=Psalm; || 'b=iAb aliquis. Page 'l3*.]ine 15 read "566" in place of "500"- ■ ' The Concordance of Schusslowicz gives the passages in full and is therefore more usefal than Breoher's work. Contents. Grammar. I. Orthography and Phonology (§§ 1—14). Page § 1. Alphabet . 1 § 2. Pronunciation of the Consonants . :i § 3. Classification of the Consonants . 1 § 4. Vowels ...... 4 § 5. SVa and Chateph .... 6 § 6. Daghes, Mappiq, Baphfe 8 § 7. The Accents ..... 9 § 8. M^thegh, Maqqeph, P^siq 13 § 9. Q^rS and K^thlbh .... 15 §10. Peculiarities of certain Consonants 16 §11. Changes of Vowels .... 19 §12. Of the Syllable 23 §13. Of the Tone ... . . 26 §14. Of the Pause 27 II, Morphologyi (§§ 15-80). A. The Pronoun (§§ 15—17). § 15. Personal Pronoun . . . . , § 16. The remaining Pronouns . . . , § 17. The Article* ... . , B. The Noun (§§ 18—39). § 18. Gender'^ § 19, Number* ....... § 20. Case . 29 30 31 34 35 35 ' Sections in which syntactical matter ' is given are indicated by an asterisk (*). Contents. XIII §21. §22. §23. §24. §25. §26. § 27. § 28. §29. §30. §31. §32. §33. §34. §35. §36. §37. §38. §89. The Construct State* The Noun with unohangeahle Vowels (Paradigms) Masculines with changeable Vowel in the Penult Masculines with changeable Vowel in last Syllable Masculines with two changeable Vowels Masculines of one Syllabe with the final Consonant doubled ....... Masculine Segholate Torms .... A. Masculine Segholate Forms from strong Stems B. Masculine Segholate Forms from i"S and V"S C. Masculine Segholate Forms from !l"b Masculines from fT'ii with two Vowels Feminines with unchangeable Vowels Feminines with one changeable Vowel Feminines with two changeable Vowels Feminines of Segholate Forms from strong Stems Feminine Segholate Forms .... Feminines in uth and ith . Nouns of peculiar Formation Numerals* ....... C. Particles (§§ 40—46). § 40. Particles with Suffixes § 41. Negative Particles* § 42. Interrogative Particles* § 43. Independent Prepositions § 44. la ... . § 45, The Prefixes 3, ?, > . § 46. "Waw copulativum* D, The Verb (§§ 47—80). § 47. Tenses and Moods, how expressed* . . § 48. Origin of the Hebrew Verb . . . , ,. § 49. The Voices of the Verb (Conjugations, Genera verbi) § 50. Laws of Vocalisation and Tone . . . '• § 51. Endings of the Perfect Page 37 39 41 42 43 45 46 47 50 51 51 53 53 53 54 56 57 57 59 63 63 64 65 67 67 69 71 73 74 77 77 XIV Contents. §•52. Endings of the Imperative 78 §53. Inflexion of the Imperfect 78 §54. Perfect Qal 79 §55. Infinitive Qal 80 § 56. Imperative Qal . . 81 §57. Imperfect Qal 81 §58. Participle Qal 82 §59. Niph'al (Niqtal) . . 83 § 60. Pi'el and Pu al (Qittel and Qixt^al) 84 §61. Hiph'il and Hoph'al (Hiqtil and Hoq^al ) 85 §62. Hithpa'el (Hithqattel) . 86 §63. Infinitive Absolute* 87 § 64. Waw Consecutive* 89 §65. Guttural Verbs .... 93 §66. Verbs K"S 97 § 67. Verbs 2"& 98 § 68. Verbs i"1S (i"S I. Glass) 100 §69. Verbs i"''S C"S II. Class) . 102 §70. Verbs S"^S (^"S in. Class) , 102 §71. Verbs r'S . . . . ■ . 103 §72. Verbs i"S 108 §73. Verbs 5»"5> 110 §74. Verbs n"b . ... 113 §75. Verbs N"i , 117 §76. Doubly and trebly weak Verbs . 119 §77. Defective Verbs . ... 121 §78. The Verb with Suffixes. I. Infinitive and Participle 122 § 79. The Verb with Suffixes. II. Perf., Imperf., Imptv. 123 §80. Nun demonstrativum . . 126 III. Remarks on Syntax .(§§ 81—91). I A. Syntax of the individual Parts of Speech (§§ 81- § 81. Pronoun- ........ § 82. Superlative and Comparative . . . . § S3. Verbs with the Accusative . . . . . § 84. Union of two Verbs to express a single Idea -84), • 128 ■ 123 129 132 Contents. XV_ B. The Sentence in General (§§ 85. 86). § 85. Distinction between Nominal and Verbal Sentences 134 § 86. Subject and Predicate 135 C. Particular Kinds of Sentences (§§ 87—91). ■ § 87. Eelative Sentences 137 § 88. Conditional Sentences 141 § 89, Optative Sentences 144 § 90. Oaths 146 § 91. Transition of the participial and infinitive Con- structions into the Oratio flnita .... 149 Paradigms. strong (regular) Verb 2* Weak (irregular) Verb' 4* Literature. I. Introductory. — 11. Dictionaries. — III. Concordances.— _ IV. Grammars. — V. On special Points. — VI. For Be- ginners, Books of Exercises. — VII. Vocabularies . 1 1* Ghrestomathia. ■ I. Exercises in EearfJing ...... 21* II. Exercises for Translation from Hebrew (Words and Sentences) : ■ . 25* III. Explanatory Notes to the Connected Extracts: I Sam. 9. 25; I Kings 3; Psalm 121. 127. 130 . . . 47* IV. Hebrew-English Vocabulary 51* V. Exercises for Translation from English (Words and Sentences) ........ VI. English-Hebrew Vocabulary . . . . . 100* VII. Appendix: Explanatory Notes to the Connected Extracts: Gen. 1—3; Psalm 1-3 . . . . 112* * XVI Corrigenda and Addenda. Page 11, 1. 8 from bottom, "first, when it is the". 16, 1. 2 read: "except" for "only". 18, 1. 7 read: "hmvrddh". 22, 1. 15 read: "appear" for "arise". 33, 1. 8 read: "with pi'oper names, when . . e.g. bSSM, 'j^.'i?'!!) liwkn . . 76, 1. 18 read: "with one another". 92, 1. 5 read : "towards itself". 1. 8 read; "the penultimate syllable". 107, 1. 9 read: "It is likely". 113, 1. 4 read: "several times". 129, 1. 16 add: "Cognate accusative". 147, 1. 16, 17 read: "where follows"- Only in a part of the copies: P. 7, 1.11 read: 12f3; 1. 15 13^!^; P.11,8: -p- [Silluq]; P. 17, 5: dnS'na; P. 32, 14: ^- [p'afchach]; 'P. 43, 13: lai2J; P. 48, 5: 133; P.48, 4 from bottom: 13S ; P. 67, 17 IJisa; P. 78, 13: iriJhlK; P.Sl/s from bottom: inSTn; P. 84, 2 from bottom: BSS; P. 88, 11: nn^; P. 94, 9: nn^IJ^; 1.'2 from bottom: nlaj, rk^; P. 133, 20: )il; P. 141, 10: mm. I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PHONOLOaY. - (§§1-14)- § 1. Alphabet. Hebrew is written from right§ 1- to left. The alphabet consists entirely of consonants. Their form, names, transcription, pronunciation and numerical value are shown in the table on the follow- ing page. Since the fundamental idea of any stem in Hebrew, 6. as in the Semitic languages generally, is almost always conveyed by the consonants, e. g. the three consonants qil always express the idea of "killing" (whereas e. g. mtr in English may signify metre, mitre, motor, mature, matter)^ an alphabet that indicated the consonants only sufficed for the Hebrews. — In doubtful cases suitable consonants were employed as matres lectionis, i. e. to indicate the vowels, viz: "i for i and e, I for o and u, rarely S for long a (§ 30c note). Concerning !n at the end of a word see § 2&. Five characters have a different form at the end c. of a word (cf. Germ, j and g): % D, ), 5|, y. Vox memorialis "j^SDM kimnappes. H. St rack, Hebr. Gramm.= I. 1 I, § 1. ALPHABET. Numer- ical value. ■ Form Name Transcription and pronunciation. 1 i( 'Aleph (spiritus lenis) 2 1 Beth b (bh) 3 'a Gimel g (gh) 4 -I Ddleth d(dh) 5 :n 1 He A(§ 2&) 6l1 Wdw rv 7 T Zdjin z (as in zeal). 8 n Cheth ch (hard, as in Scotch/ocA). 9 13 Teth t (hard, against the back part of the palate). 10 1 Jddh j (German j = Engl. y). 20 3, final T Kaph k (kh) 30 b Ldmedh I 40 ^ 'a, final D Mem m 50 , 5, final 1 Nun n 60 D Sdmskh s (hard) 70 y Ajin ' (s. § 2d) 80 B, final 51 Pe P (ph) 90 ■, S, final f Sade s 1 hard, againsttheback 100 P Qoph q, k\ part of the palate. 200 300i 400 to n i Sin V I Sin \Tdw r s (hard s) s (sh) t (th) I, § 2. PRONCNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS. 3 § 2. Pronunciation of the Consonants. § 2. When a vowel, a Chdteph (%bd), a S^rvd mobile (§5c) or a loosely closed syllable (§12^) immediately precedes, the consonants have a softer pronunciation than when this is not the case. Six consonants have the harder pronunciation regularly indicated by a point {Daghes lene, §6a) inserted in the letter: '^b, ^ g, '^ d, 's k, ti p, P\ t; but a Ih (almost v), 5 gh, "i dh, 3 kh (soft c^, as in id)), B ph, n ih, 0. n (otherwise rt, v. §6c) at the end of a word is usually 6. only an (inaudible) sign, that the preceding consonant is followed by a vowel, e. g. that nan is not to be pronounced rdbh — but r'bM, robhe, rabbd &c. accord- ing to the context. NOTE. This mater leotionis is especially employed when n (§18ei') or '' (§31 6. 74e) has been dropped in pronunciation and thereafter in writing. 1, when no vowel immediately follows, remains c. silent: 1) after i and e, 2) in the middle of a word after — , e. g. ^i'l'ii jddhekha, 3) at the end of a word ih the ending li^ dtv (also written 1 ), e. g. lilBJ ndsdrv; but 115 ^'oy, I'l'; jddhdj &c. y, a peculiar guttural, differently pronounced in d. different words, cf. Arabic c and c. The hardest pronunciation may be approximately reproduced by V. 4 Ii § 3. CLASSIFICATION OF THE CONSONANTS. §4. VOWELS. §3. §3. Classification of the Consonants: 1. Gutturals: n, n, y, S. Vox mem. »nns 2. Palatals: p, 3, 5, ''. V. m. pDia 3. Linguals : t2, n, 1 and S, b. V. m. JiSbp'i 4. Dentals 'or Sibilants : 2r, ©, 0, t. V. m. tispr 5. Labials: B, a, a, \ V. m. Sittia. In regard to hardness of pronunciation (§62&P) the following are identical: p, 12 and S; D, fi, B and ffl, D; a, *1) i ^•iid T. — 1 and i are semi-vocalic con- sonants, b, a, 2 and "i are liquids. — "i has several peculiarities of the gutturals, v. §10 &. §4. § 4. Vowels. After Hebrew had ceased to be a living speech, a system of vocalisation was invented and elaborated, probably between the sixth and the eighth century A.D., in order to preserve the proper pronunciation of the sacred writings. The current enumeration of five long and five short vowels (as follows) was introduced by Joseph Qimchi (12th Cent.). 1. Qdmes — , a, a. ^"^ jadh, ao Sdbh. 2. Sere -^, e, e. D© sem, "15 tier (from narvir). 1-;;-, e. pin cMq, ijii? 'ene. 3. CMreq magnum 1-;- or ^, i. ail ribh, ^iTi and Tl'l Ddrvidh. 4. Cholem i and — , 6, 0. tiyn mdth, ph choq. Often '■ — for 6, e. g. bp alongside of bip, more rarely i for 0. 5. Sureq \ u. *\'T\'& 'arur, 1i?i haju. I, § 4. VOWELS. 5 6. Pdthach -^,d. p'y rdq. 7. S^ghdl --, e. bia^ 'eghddl, bs 'el. 8. Chireq parvum —^,t. a& 'im, W 'tm. 9. Qdmes-chdtuph -;- , 6. ian'l rochbd, "bs A-o?. 10. ]P?&&Ms ^, w. n'^bn ChUlda, irtw sulchdn. -7- is also used to indicate the open e-sound e or B. d arising by vocalic modification (Umlauiung) out of a, e. g. »-iT zerd (from z«r, §28(?), njiSI. r^'ewa (§74^T)- Whether — is Qathes or Qdmes-chdtuph can fre- c. quently be determined only by a knowledge of the derivation of the form in question. For most cases the following will suffice: — is long a both in an accented and in an (originally) open syllable. — is 1. in an unaccented closed syllable, e.g. inttpln cAoAr/j- md; 2. before a guttural with -^ e.g. ^tty^ iovjo^mddh (§5e), iniSnn, ibya, ibnb (%Ugl) or with another Qdmes- chdtuph, e. g. Tjbys pdolkhd (§5/) ; 3. in d'^lB'iJj qodhdHm and V^O'^V sordsdrv, pi. of tS'i'p and ©"itj (§28/>). NOTE. An exception to No. 2 is the case where —^ is the vowel of the article, as in n*asn, H'^axa, Icfinijja, from niJisn + 3 ' T'TiiT' t-t:it' f/a 1 ^ • r: it ' : • — also indicates a short helping vowel, Pdthach i^ furtivum, which is inserted before a hard final guttural (ri, n, y) when preceded by a heterogeneous long vowel {i. e. all long vowels except a), mi ru^ch, T}} zdre''\ nite sfc^, 'rb.\gdl)hd''h. See further §65\V?ii; JlSJa^; iJSri; sinp'i, !iap3 (§606), ■iXM from N&3,' i&'d'^, >IKip'i; dxia iov miil^dm 25, 23, •'iWa for wisl^majjwe 27, 28. 39, ii3pa for miqq^se (fisp '^a) 8, 3. 47, 2. Raphe (nS'i, z. e. soft), a horizontal stroke over the g. letter, indicates its softer pronunciation. In printed editions of the scriptures Raphe is almost exclusively confined — not always consistently however — to cases where it is meant to indicate that the absence of a Daghes or a Mappiq is intentional; in many MSS. also over fi B3 '1 5 a, in all cases where these letters have no Daghes. § 7. The Accents. In addition to the vowel § 7, signs, each word (except when joined to the follg. by 10 I, § 7. THE ACCEHTS. Maqqeph ^8b) is furnished with one or two small signs which from their significance (now in more than one re- spect lost to us) for the chanting of the sacred text have been named Accents. We have here to treat of thei3 A. as signs of the tone, B. as signs of interpunction. A. As signs of the tone (§&.c). Most of the accents stand beside the syllable that has the main tone or stress, e. g. DiJTbs K"ia and nb^b Nip. Two are found at the beginning of the word without regard to the position of the tone (accentus praepositivi): J^tMbh D3ty 2, 23 and T^lisd gadoid yiNn' 1, 30 ; four at the end {ac~- centus postpositivi): S^gholtd i/ipin 1, 7, Pasta nisb 1, 5, Zarqd nas^^ 2, 23 and T^lUd q^tannd "iT^^^ 2, 7. In words that do not have the tone on the last syllable, a second Pastd is placed over the tone syl- lable: Vih 1, 2 thohic, but 1, 5 nixb. NOTE. Baer, wifcliout sufficient authority, also repeats S^gholtd, Zarqd and the two T^ltSd's, -wherever these accents are otherwise not entitled to stand on the tone syllable: BSatU and Tj^iax 3, 11, ■j^-ixri 1, 30,'')3?;1 2, 22, instead of: n»aiU, ^nm, y^Hil and "-1^11. B. As signs of interpunction (§TB'1 'l' Ij 1 ■ — Athndch, halves smaller verses ((}> 1, 4) and ia longer verses the part following 'Ole w^joredh i^ 1, !)■ — Great-^^MJ" . tjisn ^ 1, 1. -^ §inndr, postpos. fjbn 4' l, 1- n. -^ Small-E^iW', immediately before 'Ole w^joredti. rtini ij/ 1, 2. -^ R^bW^" mughraS (i e. iJ. with 6fej-eif, «. %h) before Silliiq. QiStsni' | 3, 10 (Methegh ace. to §8al) ; ib-^im-bs-jn!!!-! 12, 20. c. P^siq or Paseq (stopper), a perpendicular line between two words, prevents two logically connected words from being pronounced too quickly in succession as if they formed but a single word. P. is chiefly found 1. when the first word ends with the same consonant with which the following begins: nteiahri I n^Hv! 1) 21; 2. when a word is repeated: Dii iDi^ 39, 10; 3. with the names of the Deity, to secure a consciously rever- ent pronunciation: -ns iCJlbs 1-, 27 (to prevent the M. being carried over to the following eth, which would result in the word rra dead being heard), J>til irtibs i 139, 19. After P. n&Di;»a take Daghes even when I, § 8. — § 9. QBRE AND KETHIBH. 15 preceded by a conjunctive accent, e. g. nbs ilto 18, 21 (Munach). § 9., Q^re andK^thibh. In not a few passages § 9- of the boly scriptures a reading different from that furnished by the consonantal text was (for various reasons) traditional. Attention is called to these differ- ences in printed editions and in most MSS. by the con- sonants of the new reading, the O^re (I'lj?; usually, but falsely, ^^r^), being placed in the margin while the vowels belonging thereto are added to the original reading in the text, the K^thibh (a''fi3), which remains unchanged, only the so-called circellus massorethicus being added as a mark of reference. 8, 17 we find in the text XSin, on the margin ''"ip XSin, i. e. instead of the traditional consonants KSin (which would have been pronounced XSin) we have here to read ^T'7\. In the case of a few words of frequent occurrence, 6. the marginal note and the mark of reference have been dispensed with (so-called Qi^re perpetuum): sin (she), only in Pent., Q^re Sin, K^iMhh Sin.— dbWITi, nom. prop., Q. nibTBini, K. nbiBi-iv — 1D1»»i., n. pr., Q. IDte^, K. doubtless isiBffli. — lys (maiden), only in Pent., Q. niyj, K. 1J>5.— The numerical forms QiatJ, DintJ (§39e3) are without doubt to be pronounced ij©, in©; K. then Q15©, nintC. — The divine name nini, the proper pro- nunciation of which seems to be Jahwe, owing to its 16 Ij § 9' — § 10- PECULIAEIIIES OF CBETAIN CONSONANTS. utterance being considered unlawful, has the vowels of li'is, only sVa for Chateph, hence nirr^; in the same way with •j'a (§44) nin'^'a (■^i'lStt); but a;fter the prefixes a, 3, b, 1, n':;n''3, nini3, nSnib, n'jnii (lihsa &c., V. §10c4), read either badhdnaj &c. or . b^ahtve &c. Should ips stand immediately beside mn"', the latter receives the vowels of Dirtbs, e. g. nih;; ij'i!!!! i^ 109, 21. § 10. § 10. Peculiarities of certain Consonants. I. The gutturals y n n S. — 1. Not Daghes forte, but either virtual doubling (Daghes f. implicitum), i. e. simply the omission of the D., or (§lle) lengthen- ing by way of compensation (the former in decreasing, the latter in increasing frequency with n, n, 5>, S5). Article (§17):' Di*n, 1\tr\n, liyn, "lisn. Verb: laiB, tin©, inM, but ish; QFi-ia©, DRin'a, but orissia; inbap'sa, r^yi-ora, but I^iba)?, risni. II 2. Preference for the vowel a {%id. 29id. %Qd. 65); sometimes also e for original i, e. g. issn §28/. II 3. No sVa mobile but Chateph,— mostly Chateph -Pathach, with i< of the Qal before the tone syllable generally Chateph-S%h61: on'iap, oni^y, tJjn'ittS; but 'ihp, "in?, 'irs. II 4. The pronun- ciation of the gutturals in a closed pretonic or ante- pretonic syllable is often lightened by insertion of the corresponding Chateph (opening of the syllable, §12o). Noun: isb^, i-ii>;; i©'^]5, iby&. Verb (§65 I, § 10. PECULIARITIES OP CERTAIN CONSONANTS. 17 f—m.p): bbpsx, nhyx; bitsfs^ liayi; ; it:)?;, iraiy, bQ)??l, II- 1- — 1. Not Daghes forte, but always length- 6. ening by way of compensation. Article : Qi*n, ?ij?"in. Verb: Qpbtap, DPDia; bE)|?, Sfia; b^jJtt, ^flhla.— 2. Pre- ference for a, esp. as preceding vowel, of. §60c?.— 3. Chateph-Pa- thacli for SVS, mobile, esp. in some verbs med. 1 {%65r^). III. X. — 1. At the end of a syllable (and word) c. S completely loses its value as a consonant; hence ■ a) without SVa : ns^, sn^^ ; '^'^j, ^{ipn^ and p) the im- mediately preceding vowel is lengthened, because now standing in an open syllable: bt:)?, SS^; btspi, XStt?; Pibt:]?, nKStt (§75«). II 2. A preceding SVa mobile is often absorbed by the long vowel of S: D';lni?)a 200 for rrPathdjim, QifflS'i (heads) for r^'dMm. — Note also: 3. Inf. liast (say) with b becomes niaxb (to say, dicendo). — 4. Q^Mbs with the prefixes 3, 3, b, 1 becomes Dilr(b«3 &c. ishs retains after these prefixes the short vowel ijisa, ij'lKS &c. (Hence nSnia &c. §9&). NOTE. In verbs prim. guU. S at the end of a syllable has consonantal value, can, therefore, have S^wa quiesoens, v. %&bh.i. IV. n. — n is elided in certain cases after s wa d. mobile. The vowel of n is then transferred to the preceding consonant: Article §17e, verb §§59) v. §72«. II 4. Complete ex- pulsion of 1 in the verbs V'S, v. %l\f.ga.l. VI. 1. — 1. 1 is merged in a homogeneous long vowel: a) at the end of a syllable (and [of a word) after i in I: nt:ii. for jijtdbh, n7inta for Mjhudhd\ after a often contraction to e : bippi;, a'^t?''!) for jajtxbh §69&, 1D1D st.c.pl. §21e; but with suff. still sometimes SMS«y §22/"; P) at thejend of a word after another consonant, which has then to give up its vowel, in i: i'i& (fruit) for parj (§30), i3i> (misery) for "onj; irii and in": V. §766.c. 1| 2. Compare besides §§31.74. VII. 5. — D is assimilated to the following conson- ant, except when that consonant is a guttural or n I, § 10. — § 11. CHANGES OF VOWELS. 19 (§«1.61): ot) in the verbs i"s: bbj3i., bS)-; iorjinpol, biajpn, bisn, V. §67a. — p) also the finals in the verb ';riD (give), e. g. nbi:)?, nnj; Dn!:T:j:, dotii; aribofsi, oriPia. — Y) often, in prose almost without exception, in ■JM, e. g. B'7J?'a for nn^ +'jti._8) In those nouns of the forms qatl, qitl, qutl, whose second radical is 2, see §26a.&. ' § 11. Changes of Vowels. I. Vowels are un- § 11. changeable 1. when they are long either by nature "' or (as d in M1'3 star, for karvkabh from kdbhkabK) by contraction, as i-^;-, \ in most cases i, and also 1-7- ; 2. in a doubly closed syllable (§12e) , e. g. i in OTpB sanctuary, bat ''©'^1353 the sanctuaries of God, and in 1|3 circuit, 1'n'i^n 133 "^ Trspi^^wpo? xou 'lojsSdvoo ; 3. in syllables with virtual doubling: DRiritt; 4. when lengthening by way of compensation has taken place before a guttural or n: ^iftlz, DMK'a. KOTE. Exception to 2.: Accented Pathaoh is often in pause lengthened to Qames, cf. §§60/'.61d II. Changeable — i. e. may be shortened or in 6. certain cases entirely dropped — are 1. vowels made long only by the tone (tone-long vowels), esp. a and e in nouns (§ 24: OTjS'a; a;;S5 enemy, pi. Dia'^S), e and in verbs (btap he has murdered, pi. ibaj? ; bbfJ"^ he will kill, pi. ibap'^J ; 2. pretonic vowels, i. e. vowels origin- ally short, which are lengthened (v. §A) owing to 20 I, § 11. CHANGtES OF VOWELS. their position in an open syllable before the tone (lla'i word, pi. Di'ia'n; as? grape, pi. Di^i?; bt?)? ne- cavit, dFib'aj? necavistis). c- III. Dropping and Shortening of Vowels. A. In the noun, in an open syllable. 1. When the tone is thrown forward (by an afformative or st. constr.), ^the vowel that stood in the syllable before the tone is dropped: Xitej prince, f'lijn Sito? the p. of the land, pi. O'liJitei, 00''*?'^^?? principes eorum\ niJip path, /. n^irt do. I 2. If two vowels are changeable, that vowel is dropped which, when the tone is moved forward, would stand in the second syllable before the tone; the vowel preceding the one just referred to, because now in a (loosely) ' closed unaccented syllable (§12^), is shortened, a being often thinned to i. 5|:3 wing, iB53 his wing, DiiiSiS alae eorum\ 1^'^ word, , i"l2'n his word, DHi'i^'i ver'ba eorum. — For the treat- ment of changeable vowels in a shut syllable see the chapter on the forms (esp. §§24.25). d. B. Intheverb the vowel of the second radical is dropped before accented afformatives beginning with a vowel — i. e. the vowel of the syllable im- mediately before the tone: Noun. Verb. dsn ao(fi6?, nttDn oocp-^. nan he is wise, rrapn she is w. ■i|?? precious m., STi);']/. (l]?:^ he is p.) n'^fj; she is p. I, § 11. CHANGES OF VOWELS. 21 Exceptions see §50«. — Before accented affor- matives beginning with a consonant § c applies : bojj, nnbt:)?, ^'^bb'Oy) necavi te. IV. Compensation - lengthening appears e. wherever a Daghes required by the grammatical form has been omitted, a being lengthened to «, i to e, M to o: 1. when virtual doubling has not taken place, always before gutturals and '^ (examples §10al.&l); — 2. at the end of a word (§6/1) ; a, however, remains in most cases unlengthened , e. g. QS! for 'imm, ph for chuqq, ^a for gann, cf. §§26&. 73/. 74s. V. Of the remaining vowel changes the most im- /. portant are those affecting Pdthach. 1. P. in an un- accented closed syllable very frequently becomes «: in the strong verb regularly in yt3l5i., bQ)33, bC3f3,bipj?ri; in the noun cf. t|Di'' '''13'=T, the words of Joseph, for dairS, QHiian from li'i §25&; ^T\^ from ns §26«?y; ''fs'ia from sadq §28«. II 2. P. becomes S'ghol before cM and ch" and before unaccented hd and a, when the guttural is virtually doubled: itlS my brothers, ''ns; Wan^ (for lahMlhdth) flames, tBX tlisrib flames of fire. More exx. §17c. — Exception n'nh, to the moun- tain, 14, 10 for hdrrd. VI. Else of new vowels. 1. The prefixes 3, 3, g. b, 1 before a guttural with Chateph receive the cor- responding short vowel. Di^K + S becomes DinsSi, so 22 I, § 11. CHANGES OF VOWELS. Diisb, Dins;i ; ibn + b becomes "hrh, ibm ; -iffis + a becomes nma, so ntOSS, 1»Kb, ITBSV — Exceptions: -ib«b, Dirtbsa, ''S'lsa (n;^nia), ij'iki &c., see §iOc. 2. a, 5, b (§ 45) before SVa receive the vowel i : 'n -in'n the word of Jahwe, IS'ia, "IS'IS, 'lanb (syllable loosely closed, v. §12r). — A following i quiesces in i (§10/a): n'lin'^ + 3 becomes fTl^nia ; so, too, after 1 copul. : n'linil. 3. 1 copul. (l) before sVa and the labials (51^13) becomes 1 (m) : 'n ID'll, rr^il, Ijb'h^, b?S1 (§ 46). HOTE. Before lip-sounds tlie Babylonian punctuation has 1 i. e. ). 4. In the syllable before the tone not only are originally short vowels lengthened (§&2), but even new vowels arise: a) under the prefixes a, a, and esp. b, v. §45; — p) under 1 cop. at the end of a sentence or part of a sentence, i. e. after a large dis- junctive, and with words occurring in pairs: nb'^bl dii day and night, sy[ aia good and evil, Qijal Dtib bread and water. Cf. Gen. 8, 22. 5. In two consonants end, except ns, thou /., and the 2 /. sg. perf., I^bi:j3 &c., only a few forms from weak verbs (§74o.?), a few words ending in X, as s'lUJ, misri, and 'nns nard, tjffip truth. In all other cases the pronunciation is facilitated by the insertion of a helping vowel (genly. S'ghol, hence the expression I, § 11. — § 12. OT THE SYLLABLE. 23 "segholate forms"; in the case of gutturals mostly Pathach; after Jodh i). For details see _§§27— 30. 36«. 65. 74. § 12. Of the Syllable. — Commencement of a § ^2. syllable (Silbenanlaut) (§«.&). Every syllable, and hence every word, must begin v^ith one consonant, i.e. neither with a vowel (for single exception i?. §ll5'3) nor with two consonants. If the first consonant 6. of a syllable (or a word) has no vowel of its own, it receives SVa mobile §5c, or (with 5>nns) Chateph §5t?. 10«3. Close of a syllable (Silbenauslaut) (§ c — s). — c. A distinction is made between: I. open syllables, or those ending with a vowel: !imp, nife, ins, nsti (n v. §2&). They have always a long vowel. (Exception: the verbal suffix dni §796). — Syllables ending in s are regarded as open: bc)?, SSM (cf. however §10c note.) Unaccented syllables with a long vowel are open; d. the following SVa is S. mobile: D'l'i'JaiB s^-m^nwi. II. shut syllables, or those ending in a con- e. sonant: bB"^ (2nd syll.). — They are called doubly shut, when the consonant closing the syllable is immediately followed by another consonant in the same word: nrSB (1st syll.), wbo-^ (2nd syll.). If the two consonants are identical or have been made 24 I, § 12. OP THE SYLLABLE. SO (i. e. if the vowel is followed by a cons, with Da- ghes), the syllable may also ^be termed sharpened: ilBlsri (sylls. 1 and 2), /. Unaccented shut syllables have always a short vowel: b^'T-^'u (1.), i^'^ (1.), Ojjfl (1. 3.), intt^il (1. 3.). ff. Unaccented syllables with a short vowel are shut : iron (1.). h. In an accented shut penultima we find only following vowels: a) the tone-long vowels d,e, o: JTE^, IsS^i (2.), hence neither i nor u, nor yet the essentially {i. e. by nature or by contraction) long vowels a, e, d; P) the. short vowels a, e: J^blbj?, laaiia. i. In an accented shut ultima all long vowels may appear; of the short vowels a and e, sometimes even I, esp. the two particles ns (if), Q? (with), which, however, are often (as ya always) made toneless by Maqqeph, and the form a'O';^ §74oa. k. III. Opened syllables, i. e. syllables, whose originally double close has been removed by a helping vowel. — 1. At the end of a word: genly. a help- ing vowel (cf. §lli), in most cases S^ghol, though also (esp. when the last letter, or the last but one, is a guttural) Pathach. The accented vowel of the opened syllable is then in most cases lengthened, viz : 6 (■&) to o: TD'ip, ann, ms; i to e: i&o, snit; d to e: 5>-i,t, V. ^28c.d. I, § 12. OF THE SYLLABLE. 25 If the last letter but one is a guttural, Pathach I. remains in the opened syllable unchanged: lyi §28e, tm, nriDin §36«, bT^ §74os. If the last letter but one is i , Chireq is used as »«■ helping vowel. Pathach remains in an opened syllable: 11? §29a; also in the suffix-form Jf.^, e.g. tfirt^SJ, and in the dual ending Q^^ djim. In the apocopated impf. of verbs n"b the length- «. ening of « to e is often dispensed with, v. §740^, e. g. bjii. for jigl. 2. In the middleofa word the consonant clos- o. ing the syllable, if a guttural, frequently receives for ease of pronunciation the Chateph corresponding to the preceding vowel, without this vowel being lengthe- ned. Exx. §10fl!4. i'lS^i, in syllables nd^-rd. The vowel remains unlengthened even when, in- p. stead of the Chateph owing to its being followed by a SVa, the corresponding short vowel is written, v. §5/'. pmi, pi. ipmi, divide ip'Tni, abni, pi. labni (wbni). IV. Loosely shut syllables we call suchsylla- ?• bles as were originally followed by a vowel, which has been dropped in accordance with the general laws in §§llc2 and \\d. That a syllable is loosely closed may be recognized by the fact that mssias retain their aspiration. The sVa is not vocal, is not SVa mobile. Exx. to §llc2: ff|23, DniS53 kan-phe-hem %2b a; Disb'a 26 I, § 12.— § 13. OP THE TONE. for malakUm, Dn^'Dbtt §28A; tfinhnn chor-hho-thdjikh §35«.— To §11"y the endings n , 1, i-^ even in the other conjugations, e. g. from Dip : HMp she has risen, ittj? they have r., iwp arise (iptv. /.) ; I §, 13. — § 14. OF THE PAUSE. 27 6. ia a number of forms of ihe impf. without afformatives when 1 consecut. is prefixed (§64^./t — n) ; 7. several times in pause, see ^lAg.h.i; 8. frequently, also^ to avoid the concurrence of two tone-syllables: in a word with open penultima and long open or short closed ultima, when im- mediately followed by a monosyllable or by a word with the accent on the first syllable, the tone is generally shifted back to the penultimate syllable: n^b X"!)? 1, 5; nrfi bD«n 3, 19; DW W 19, 27. KOTE 1. Thus retrogression of the tone does not take place 6. with a closed penultima or from a long vowel in a closed ultima (with the occasional exception of Sere): ilPiN 'IBS dust art thou 3, 19 ; nor yet when the first word ends with a heavy suffix, nor ■when the. distinctness of pronunciation would he affected: ffObTli (ibx these three 9, 19, Tij) X'i|3'^ Kh 17, 5. — Ser6, when deprived of the tone in a closed ultima, either receives Methegh ('j^'^S bs J Isa. 40, 7. 8) or is shortened to S^ghol (cf. §59/'). NOTE 2. The tone never rests on the antepenultima. Isa. c. 40, 18. 50, 8. Job 12, 15 are only apparent exceptions, to be ex- plained ace. to §§5/'. 12^ (against Delitzsch on Isa. 40, 18 and in the preface to Baer's edition of Job p. VI). § 14. Of the Pause. I. At the end of sentences §14. and of the larger divisions of a sentence, many changes take place in the accentuation and the vocalisation, which are occasioned partly by general considerations of rhythm, partly by a special regard for the solemn recitation of the sacred text. 28 I, § 14. OF THE PAUSE. 6. II. These changes appear uniformly with Silluq, S^gholta, SaUeleth and 'Athnach, often with Zaqeph ; in the books of Psalms, Job, Prov. (§7/) : always y^iih. Silluq,' Ole w^joredh, and, in smaller verses, yfithAthndch, often with 'Jthndch Sifter 'die n>ydredh; rarely with other accents. c. III. The pausal effects are not the same for all accents; nnx, thou m., e.g. appears with Silluq, 'Athnach and '016 w^jo- redh as flPS, with Zaqeph and 'Athnach after 'ole w^joredh as nSX, cf. Gen. 3, 19. '1T seed, S'lr. — p) Pathach and S'ghol in the ground-form of the perf. Pi'^el become Sere: tJ^tt, tiba; la'n he has spoken, -iSi'n (^GOd.e). e. NOTE. Monosyllahles with Pathach remain in most cases unchanged: fa 30, 21, 1J 49, 27. /"• 2. Vowel changes, a) Sere sometimes becomes Pathach: ^t^nfregit, isri; Sfb;; ?&/^, ^b^l; bcjjji,, baa*1 and he was weaned. — p) Sere becomes Qames in the perf., iptv., impf. Hithp. (bee. here originally a), §62n these towns 19, 25. n, § 16. — § 17. THE ARTICLE. 31 NOTE 1. iij also as adverb: 1) here; 2) now. 6. NOTE 2. The separate pron. of 3. pers. is also used as c. demonstrative pron. : NSlfin ujijjin that man. The three forms of the relative pronoun: "ITB!*, IT d. (poet.) and •© (esp. North-Israelitish and late) stand for all numbers and genders. The very common 1T»X serves in fact as Nota relationis. Hence it confers, in the first place, relative signification to following pronouns and adverbs, e. g. : ia in him, ia . . TilJK in which; DtO there, Qffl. .ifflK where (cf. §2U); secondly, it is used in place of some cpnjunctions (that, be- cause, when). Of. § 87. The interrogative pronoun^ ip who?, na what? is e. sometimes used also for the indef. pron. (quisquis, qui- cunque). NOTE, na retains Qame§ with disjunctive accents; further f. always before !!< and ^, generally before rt, when this letter has not Qames. Before- non-gutturals we write Ha followed by Daghe§ and, usually, Maqqeph: '^~na, tl|"!ia. Before fj, n, S, sometimes also at the beginning of a sentence, the pointing is Ina (of. §11/5): inxan na and ni'iis na 20, 9.— nt ia, n^rna v. § 17. A, The Article in Hebrew (as also e. g. § ^^• in Greek) was originally a demonstr. pron., cf.ni*'ln this day, to-day 4, 14, nbi^in this night 19, 34, D?sn this time=at last 2, 23; ITO nys (§e) to-morrow at this time. 32 II, § 17. THE AKTICLE. NOTE. This pronominal force also shows itself when the article is joined to the finite verb: (ISjari 18, 21. 46, 27 (§76^), ib— i^isn 133 his son, that was born to him 21,3. Cf. also pilBrt rj"'^?'!'! tlie thigh and what was thereon (the fat) 1 Sam. 9, 24. 6. As shown by the examples just quoted, the article- is usually written n followed by Daghes forte. The D. is dropped according to §6/", esp. when "i or a part. Pi' el follows: ipiS-^n, Dlp'^n, Diba'npn. c- "When followed by a guttural (§10«1), the article takes a) — before unaccented hd and '«, as also before chd and ch" (§11/2): Qiinn, Cl^n, fiVT}/, ann, DDnn, Diffijliin ; p) — before y in the other cases, and always before S, 1, e. g. : QST}, ^^Vr\, O'l'iayv) ', lisrj, iJJ'in ; 7) — before n and n, in the other cases, e. g.: sinn, bDinn; ntisrin, nttsnr, ffi'^hn. — Ex- ceptions: to P)W, blind, takes n; to y) inn the mountain, nihn towards the mt., Dnn and niann those, inn the living one 6, 19. d. y\'& (earth, country) with the article becomes 'j'-ixn.— On in (§cy), 1&, d? see §26c£. e. After the prefixes 3, 3, b (§45) the n of the article is elided together with the preceding sVa: D'^^n the water, DiBS in the w., W^ to the w., QiISS like the w., -lisn the light, -iixb to the 1., ^©fin the darkness, ^i»nb to the d. ; ']i»»n the smoke, ■jiBSls like the s.— Exception: Qi'^ns (8) 39, 11 etc. II, § 17. THE AETIOLE. 33 B. Use of the Article. — The article in Hebrew /• differs from the article in English in being found: 1. with well known material and class names: Abram was very rich snui 51033 Hifsiaa in cattle, in silver and in gold 13,2; pitch it IBsa with pitch 6, 14. — 2. with many abstract nouns, esp. with physical and moral defects: struck them Qillssa with blindness 19, 11. — 3. frequently with names of towns, when the recollection of the appellative signification was still preserved: lyn, H'B'irj. — 4. with the vocative of nouns otherwise qualified to receive it: -fb^fi King! — 5. with comparisons, when the tertium comparationis is regarded as attribute, of the class to which the ob- ject employed in the comparison belongs: he staggers "liSffiS [because all drunken men stagger] like a drunken man; Isa. 1,18: if your sins be red D''i1!J3 like scarlet, they shall become white Sbl63 as snow; if they be red 2>bin3 like crimson, they shall become IttSS like wool.* The article is not employed, however, when the tert. compar. is affirmed of only a part of the class. The article does not stand: 1. before substan- g- tives that are determined by a following genetive or suffix: 'n la'l the word of Jahwe, i"i3'l 6 Xoyos [xou. — * Cf. Ed. Biehm on i/ 17, 12 (in: Herm. Hupfeld, Die Psalmen 2 I, 445. 446). H. St rack, Hobr. Giamm.' I. 3 a. 34 II, § 17. — 18. QENDEK. 2. often in poetry: di 2, 2 yis; but after 3, 3, b usu- ally as in prose: afeTBBS <\) 1, 5, Q'l.wa (|j 2, 4. h. The article with adjectives: nb'ian li^n the great city. — So usu. with the demon, pron. : nitn ©isn this man, J^^inn !lb';^3 on that night 19, 35; though also: Xin lnb';b5 19, 33 &c. (doubtless for reasons of euphony), nxT '^inJJSffi'a from this my oath 24, 8. B. THE NOUN (§§ 18—39). IS § 18. Gender. The Hebrew language has no special forms for the neuter. Where other languages use the neuter, we find in Hebrew mostly the fem.pl., and not unfrequently the masc. pi. or fern, sg., e. g. yiS M thereby shall I know 24, 14. NOTE. The masculine, as the superior gender, stands not unfrequently for the feminine, especially in the suffix pronouns: dwnb they stopped them (the wells niisan f.) 26, 15; bsiax your father (Leah and Eachel are addressed) 31, 9. The mas&. sing, has no termination. The old termination n of the fem. sing, is still preserved a) after u and i: n*iba, fiin?; tti-\'TQ, JT^ia; li P) when a helping vowel {-^ or ^, §36a) has been inserted after the immediately preceding cons.: ilbss'a knife, for md^khalt; nnsin reproof, for tdkhacht; esp. in partcps. n'lbi"' a woman in childbirth, for jo-ladht; || y) seldom as dth, in ^ipia, emerald, and in proper names tiB'ia, nyas. — The In of the old ending dth has been in almost II, § 18.— 19. XDMBEE. § 20. CASE. 35 all cases dropped, the a, now standing in an open syllable, lengthened to a, and, as an indication of this, n, rendered superfluous however by the introduction of the vocalisation, added as mater lectionis (§26) : ni2?5a commandment, for mistvdth, cf. §21 ibs a potter's vessel; lysn the boy, nSsn bip the boy's voice. — P) Ace.': VSTa "IT? he found help, iM'in ©''Si! a man have I slain; bsin iripxba and he finished his work; i3ba ''PiDDD I have appointed my king. e. The determined ace. is often, esp. in prose, in- dicated by prefixing -n^ or nx: In the beginning God * IMS has Daghes forte conjunctivam, §6ep. II, § 20. — 21. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. 37 created fy^'n ns"; D'^'affin ns; and she bare Tip-ns Cain; thou hast scattered i5is~b3"ri» all my foes. § 21. A. The Construct State. In expres- sions such as "the voice of the boy", "a yessel of a f. ^' potter", the second subst., the genetive, as the sub- ject to which something is assigned, has the main tone or stress. The first word, the nominative, is pro- nounced more rapidly, with less stress. This explains the fact that in Hebr. the first subst. is, if possible, shortened, especially in regard to its vocalisation. The rule §llc is here applied as if thenom. were 6. unaccented and the second word a monosyllable or had the accent on the first syllable. Ti^j prince, "i'2 1""?: the prince of Tyre. Further exx. v. §e. The first member of such a connexion, indeed c. every noun (the nomen regens) closely connec|;ed with the following word, stands in the status constmctus (construct state). Status absolutus (absolute state) is the name used to designate the unshortened form of the noun, when not intimately connected with the following word. In consequence of the intimate relation of the d. first word to the gen., the old ending dth (§18cy)- has maintained itself in the st. con. of the /. sg. in place of the later n— : ni2^, 'n inlStt the command- ment of Jahwe. gg n, § 21. THE CONSTRUCT STATE. e. The St. con. of the m. pi. ends in "<— (formerly aj, V. §10/a) : liaa, asitt iSiaa the heroes of Moab ; Mis,;?/. n'^asis, c. D'l'aiBn lapiS the stars of heaven; QSn, p^. CttDn, c. nS'iB ittpn Pharaoh's wise men*. The end- ing of the St. con. of the dual is the same: D';?''?, 'n 151? the eyes of J. ; Q'^bS'i, tJixr. "^baS the feet of the man. In the fern. pi. the ending of the st. con. is the same as that of the st. ahs. : niSB, riiS'an the commandments, 'n rii;2'a the commandments of J. /■ B. Use of the Construct State. The st. con. serves to indicate not only the subjective but also the objective genetive: 'n ins'i'^ the fear of (one feels to- wards) Jahwe, thp t^p_'$X the cry regarding (of) Sodom 18, 20. Before suffixes (§22&): iwan his wrong C^ 7, 17, ipttti the wrong towards me G. 16, 5. g. The st. con. can likewise stand 1. before preposi- tions: islatt ins one of us 3, 22; 1i2|ja nrittto the joy in the harvest ; esp. after a participle: rtS ''3l£i'', (}^ 24, 1; -i)?i35 "itt'iSWtt Isa. 5, 11; rtb n^t^ti'Q G. 24, 21. h. 2. before relative clauses (that stand virtually in the gen.): QtO "ilDSi CjOi'' 1l»X Qiptt the place where J. was bound 40, 3; esp. with such as are not introduced by ^m, e. g. inis 'n b^sn oi^Si on the day in which J. * nS'lB is regarded as tone-syllable ace. to §6 ; "^a syll. before the tone; 3 loses its vowel ace. to §llc2; finally, the vowel of H must he short, because now standing in a shut unaccented syllable. II, §21. — 22. THE NOON WITH UNGANftEABLE VOWELS. 39 had saved him (}; 18, 1 ; TTi njln In^'ij? the city where D. had encamped, Isa. 29, 1. More in §87A.»j. §22. The Noun with unchangeahle vowels §22. (Paradigm on p. 40 f.). The derivation of the sufficca nominis from the ^ro>i. abso- a, lutum is particularly well seen in the 1. pi. With WS and Mi^S comp. *I3X. This example shows at the same time that the pronoun on being affixed is mutilated at the beginning, of. TiaTTjp [aou with iraTTjp l[AoS. — With the change of n to S in the 2. pers. (iinx, ?(; bPK, dD) comp. the reverse change in the inflexion of the verb §51e. The nominal suffixes denote the gen. and are attached to 6. the St. con. (§21/"). Forms like ?]"'ia-Jpa §24a, ')2"'=Va §28^ are only afpparenf exceptions. ■ A distinction is made between light and heavy suffixes. The c. heavy suff. are: D3, 'fi, Vn, "jri. Between the singular noun ending in a consonant, and such d. suffixes as begin with a consonant, there is generally inserted a "union-vowel" (Bindevoeal, at §79e). This vowel is: e with sujf. 2. f. Sff.: t^^S and 1. pi.: *l3^l', a with stiff. 3. pers. : ilS (i from ahu), m??, Dns (D -^ from aheni), ■•la ; and 2. »w. Sff. in pause : ?l|iS (§14i7, eA;Aa half length- ening for akha). S^wa mob. with swff. 2. »». s^. : rjiss, hence ^fi,!;^a with Qames. The union -vowel has often been completely dropped before the heavy suffixes: dsnisa, '|5nisa.— In dS'iS S*wa mobile, because the vowel of the stem is unchangeable. NOTE. Si, ']S retain their aspirated pronunciation even after a shut syllable (contrary to §6o): dS^nj (cf. Germ. Papachen alongside of maehen). Forms without union-vowel [sg. 2. /. T\, 3. m. in and 1, 3. /. e. rt; pi. 1. 13, 3. w. dil, 3. /. "11] are appended to 2N, nx, dll, flB, whose sf. cow. ends in a vowel, §38; likewise in part, for the same reason, to nouns from n"i-stems, §§30c.31; finally, always to the st. con. of the m. pi. 40 II, § 22. THE NOUN WITH UNCHANGEABLE VOWELS. f. In appending suffixes to masculine plurals the old form of the st. con. aj is taken as the ground-form (I'lS, T\''h'S, I'^'iS). Before the 2. m. Sff. and the 3. f. sg, it becomes i-^^ iy^"}!?., fj'^t!?)) before the suffixes of the pi. '^-^r- (13''^? &o.). ,' " ' g. In appending suffixes to plurals in Hi a twofold indication of the plural is found almost without exception, viz : a masculine in addition to the feminine ending: "'niaa instead of miswdth,-\-%, ai ivToXai [xou. Only the sujf. 3. pi. (Q — , "i — ) are attached quite as frequently to the simple plural ending HI. We find always dSTiattJ, ■jniaia, DniTi'n ; mostly UreaiApatres eorwm (suos), not till later dfninhs. h. Only the foUg. have a special form in pause: 1. sg. and 2.f. sg. in the pi. and du.: "iJiS, '^m; ^'^i'^S, 'ri':3"'?; as also 2. m. sg. m-. ?i^ii3, ^}yp. ' " i. Bare forms of suff. in the sg. : a) 2. m. sg. iiD for tj, aco. to §26, ns'l^ thy hand, cf. 113^, rtsxa §76^.— P) 3. m. sg. iin, esp. sinj'iaV '(i'i) for iJia^ (4) after its 'kind [union-vowel e]. ini^ his neighbour, beo. ?^ is a contraction from ns^. — ri, etymological spelling for i [«.§(?], e. ^. rfif]5t (4) his tent. — y) 3. f. sg. sometimes ri—^ for PI-;-. II 8) 1. pi. 1!-;-, thus always i|5|3 42, 1 1 and elsewhere, cf. «b §456.— e) 3. m. pi. poet.: iaabn their fat, ia^'na their fruit, ■iais their mouth. Cf. ia^ §45c, ia^ni'i §79c.— Q 3. f. pi. nsa-ip their inward part 41, 21, VlSotl^l? (Inl'pi.) 30, 41. 112^3 it alf (lit. sumtna earum, fem.=ntr. §18a). i^J^?^ 21, 29. 'Ji^i? 21, 28. k, Rare forms of suf. in the plur. : a.) 3. m. ^i. iainas, iain'ins'ia , e. 5'. 'fj'bs^ thy words, for ^'''l!5'7, often not to be distinguished from ?]'l2'n thy word, pause form of ^Jl^^. 13^?""?^' Ii21, 'lna^fia>i 4, 4. Singular. ny witness msM commandment *i|5® 'I? a lying witness* 'n nDStt the com. of Jahwe I'ly 1. Si?, my w. '^W;^'!? 1- s^'- my c. irjnSJ 2. »«. s^. thy w. ^MJT'a 2. m. sg. thy c. ^ny 2. f. sg. thy w. tfti'^sa 2. /. 5'. thy c. Literally: testis mendacii, i.e. testis mendax. II, § 22. THE NOUN WITH UNCHANGEABLE VOWELS. — 5 23. 41 Singular. ■ilS 3. m. sg. his w. rt"!? 3. /. s^. her w. IS'iy 1. i?/. our w. QD^y 2. ?w. p/. your w. ')5'15[ 2. /". ;?/. your w. D'l? 3. ffj. pi. their w. 17? 3. f. pi. their w. D'l'T? witnesses 1)30 I'l? lying w. I'ly 1. s^. my w. Tjin? 2. »». s^". thy w. ^nny 2. /". s^. thy w. 1i'l2> 3. »«. sg. his w. rjiiy 3. /. sg. her w. iliii? 1. pi. our w. DD'i'iy 2. m. pi. your w. IDiiy 2. /. /)/. your w. Qniny 3. m. jo?. their w. ini'iy 3. f. pi. their w. Sni;2a 3. »j. sg. his c. }:ilni2a 3. f. sg. her c. ISnlSTa 1. pi. our c. nstilStt 2. ?w. p?. your c. iDlnlSB 2. /■. pi. your c. nmisia 3. m. pi. their c. "\f)^Ta 3. /. />/. their c. Plural. inistt commandments 'n n'lSi'a the c. of Jahwe inittt 1. «^. my c. ?ii|niS"a 2. »«. s^-. thy c. iyiniStt 2. /: sg. thy c. Iiniilia 3. m. sg. his c. niniStt 3. f. sg. her c. 15i|n'lStt 1 . pi. our 0. DD^'fiiS^ 2. m. p/. your c, IDilniStt 2. /■. pi. your c. DlniS'a 3. m. pi. their c. iniaa 3. /'. pi. their c. § 23. Masculines with changeable Vowel §23. in the Penult. Of. the phonetic law §llcl.— Xii»J, ''' y'y&r^ site? the prince of the land, D''Sl"'tei, bsntei. ''»!''»:, 42 11, §§23. 24. MASCULINES WITH ONE CHANGEABLE VOWEL. b. With final guttural: a) Pdihach furtivum: n'^ffiiari, 'n n^tili, butiniffiM &c. ; with final s: ^''35; — 3) before ?i, Q5, ')? Chdteph-Pdthach: DDSili. c. If the word begins with a guttural, §10«3 takes effect: f;$, ''I'^xn 'ji?, ipi?, j>?. mbiy, inbis;. (Z. In nouns of the formation 'ji'1)5S the Daghes is in most cases, dropped with the — . 'ji'lST, ^Dilpt; but '*^" S 24. Masculines with changeable Vowel a. " ° in last Syllable. I. Qames remains in an open syl- lable before the tone (also before ?;, %22d), becomes Pathach in an unaccented closed syllable {si. c. sg. and before D3, 'jD) and disappears entirely, ace. to §llcl, when the tone is moved two places forward {st. con. pi. and before DDi^r, ')?''-;rj or^'^^T) ir]''':r)' tB'n)5'a, 'n ©'iijs'a, iil?'!]?^, ^^iiB'^ls'n, Q'^iii'ipia, ^"lOTl?):, ■'OTfJtt 6. With a guttural: ifsb^o, D''DN!?)3, 'Ti'l '^SSib^; sni'tt, c. Monosyllables. T^, Qisn 1^, 5yT, DDi:: !, <^m.Q"'.'1^^, II'T, 'ito? 'I'j'i, oni'i-;.— D% 5>i?1v3B^. ^'3i D3i:^.! (§11/1), Qiia'n, Dni'a'^. (Shortened from dame, jddhe, from n"b.) (Z. II. Sere remains in si. con. sg. unchanged: ns'' ^"liljn. It is found shortened to S^ghol only before Maqqeph; almost (§38) without exception in "ja, e. g. Tfr']'3t the son of Haran, sometimes in dTB, e. g.-VU- II, § 24.— § 25. 1IASC0LINES WITH TWO CHANGEABLE VOWELS. 43 TDT^. — On the other hand Sere disappears even in the open syllable before the tone : a;;», ''n'^'S, D'^a^i?. Before ^, 03, ]5 it is shortened to e^or even to original ?. ns\ I'lS'ji,- iri-is''; ; a;;i«, ^i^ai.sji. — To this group' belong all participles with e' in the last syllable and not a few adjectives, such as a^S dumb, iB"!!! deaf,'ilS' hlini, pi. Bifi^K, QilB'irij.ni'llS (1 V. §6/").- With a guttural: bxii, ibsh, Tjbxa; DDS'nia ; ' nsitt, «• ni'TSitt, arnstol.— The forms naftt, s?. cow. of.niip? and 'itey'ig or itoa, s^. c. of lte?'a, are to be explained by the fondness of their final consonants for a. Of. however TSp'a lamentation, con. IBptt and ']j?t §25rf. 'Monosyllables. "jS see §38. — QW, ittiij, i^ttC,' !?!»«, f. tiitt©, niiiaan nia©.— yy, o'l^inn f?, ^jjy, ciisy, *yis5>,' § 25. Masculines with two changeable §2^* Vowels. Phonetic law §llc2. — I. Vowels a and a. t|i3, i&S3, a^lSSi &53, n6 Mb, lanb, Mab. 3;y, DiSS^n, iBi"i ''Ssy poisonous grapes (Daghes v. §6eP). III. Vowels aande. 1. Substantives. Sere is shorty ened in the st. c. to Pathach, remains, however, in an open syllable before the tone (differently with a|;ic &c. %2id): IpT, iriia ijJT the eldest of his house, Di:]3T, ^i*']i»': "'W^ ^TW- "^^*^ ^ guttural: nsn, D^snisn -isn, i-isn, Ti'i'isn, nirtbxn ni3 i")l?ri. — Examples with D3, p in the sg. do not occur. In the St. con. the following resemble segholates (§28): ?i'i'i loin, nmssi -fi^ 13']'', D'^3")";; l^a wall, "Ti? isnri, iTia ; qriS humerus, latus, St. c. EiriS, SM/f. i&PS ; cf. b-i» '&c. §^. 2. Verbal adjectives (§58&). Several retain Sere in the pi. st. con.: 'jiC'i, niW"^, p?. c. iJiB'i; Qiri3«, instj d-^ribs; yen, Difisn, ''n^'n issri (j; 40, 15; b3x, ox-bst?! (};35,14, nib3s, ^"3? ib3s, i''b3s.— TOto, nnwto, crfato, inS'i irate at my misfortune (p 35, 26 and ab-inpto Isa. 24, 7. II The pi. con. is wanting in: pte neighbour, inhabitant, 'i'lTate pte, iD3te, I31531B; obte integer, Dittbte; IBS'; dry, nffia";; 3'1)3 approaching, 0131]?; IDn, c. 3b 'iDn; ^■70' c- ^"^H! ^^?' °''^'??' ?=li?i <^- y^i?) *^??to; 3»"i, DISS'!. II With rejection of Sere: Si^ri profane, QiBSn, 3b iS?n. Verbal adjectives ending in X retain Sere in the II, § 25. — 26. MASC. OF ONE SYLL. WITH DOUBLE FINAL CONSONANl. ^5 con. sff.: s-in, WTIbiA X-i";, D'^X')'', ?i''Xl';, 'n ^s-i-;; sbtt, Dip^^Kbia, nisbw; sai:, n«iQt:, ninsto sat:, oisn nsat: impura quoad nomen; XttS, nsttS. b'ly, c. ab bny (§e) and D-inste b"!?, pi. D''b'i5;, ibl.? ^. ntoa ; nas, c. ^iy >i3s and ■jicb ^33, fi^nas, ^ii»b I'las ; (-["IN long, only in st. c. :) Difi!« Jfiit longsuffering. Anomalous: »b:t side, rib, c. ybi? and y^s, swyf. i. ■>»!:¥, ;?/. ni»b2, iini>bs.— apy heel, itey apy, iapy, lapy, 01D-ia^y (hoofs, i?a^. §6ep). § 26. Masculines of one Syllable with the §26- final Consonant doubled. In those nouns of the forms qatl, qitl, qutl in which the second letter of the stem is either identical with the third or is the letter 3, which assimilates with ease (§10^), the last two con- sonants coalesce and form one double consonant. From the stem "fiTi we have, formed after qitl, isn my arrow, Di^n arrows; so from Tsy: n^Ty {iov'inzim), goats, ir^i-Ty thy goats. In all forms with formative additions (esp. suff. 6. and pl.^ the vowel of the^stem, because standing in a closed syllable, is unchangeable. In the sing, on the contrary, when without afformatives, compensation lengthening (§lle) takes place, since the last letter of a word cannot have Dag. forte, u becomes 0, i becomes e ; a alone usually remains unchanged, except when coin- ciding with a logical pause (Stade §193&). (See, how- 46 II, § 26. — § 27. MASOUUNE SEGHOLATE FORMS. ever, §c£). Thus "arrow" is not cMss but fn; "goat" noi' izz but T?; "timbrel" not tupp but ^T\\ but from WCiS, D? people.— The long vowel resulting from the compensation lengthening is shortened only before Maqqeph, e. g. nn abundance, bDS'a"!, but 'ja'^i an. c. Anomalous, a) 6 beside u. Tb strength, i-Ty beside i-T5>, ^-'y beside TiW.— P) Daghes is sometimes omitted before !?; and DD (§6/3): ph, i?ij5n, B?)?n. — Y),In a few words « is thinned to Hn a syllable with Daghes: MS, !r!r\&; ns, (TC^S; cM^A fear (nn), DDPin. — 8) When the consonant to be doubled is a guttural or 1, a is always lengthened inthe;>ZMr.: in, DSnn, liTOitJ inn; "iS, "''IS, Oni"]^. — s) nn, "i&, oy with the article are always written nnn, nan, oyn. d. In some words the third radical is doubled with- out any etymological reason. Hence their inflexion resembles that of the nouns treated of in this §. Ex- amples: Db and Y'», with a helping vowel in most cases only in thes^., §29; C. from stems T\"b with a helping vowel in the pi. and du., §30. § 28. A. Masculine Segholate Forms from § strong Stems. The monosyllabic ground-form re- mains in the singular before all afformatives, because by these the second consonant is drawn to the following syllable, and a helping vowel may accordingly be dispensed with: malk isbia his king, siphr ilsp my book, ars ]5>d5 HS'IS to the land of Canaan. — Instead of the original m, however, there is found (almost, v. §«) always d: qudS ilB'I]? his holiness. Original a is, ace. to §11/1, often thinned to i: sadq ip'ia my righteousness. The dual is likewise formed usually from the ground- b. form: D'^Bbx, D''.?')]?, Di.bi'i, miif. But ri'i'in'; i&biC is pi. In the uninflected singular (stat. abs. a,nd con.) c. the doubly closed syllable of the ground- form is opened by an (of course, toneless) helping vowel, mostly -^— , being placed under the last consonant but one (§12/^). In consequence of this a becomes e malk ^ba king t becomes e siphr IBp book (m) becomes o qods iB'ip holiness. 48 Hi § 27. MASCCLIHE SEGHOLATB FORMS TKOM STBONS STEMS. d. If the third or the second radical is a guttural, Pathach is usually the helping vowel employed: J>'1T, rtSb, in'-i, nsh; but with final S, S^ghol: S"iS wild ass, SOT young grass. (Exceptions: xtin sin, X'^a §29fl!, i^l© §29c). — The final consonant in n?ii (usually ipa ace. to §30) and nan is, ace. to §2&, no guttural. e. When the second consonant of the stem is a gut- tural, an a under the first remains in most cases un- changed (§12/): 1?D, in©, lalnb. But nnb, bread, and usually nrfl (4 times tim). /". The si. co«. generally remains unchanged. ButJ>©n and 5>aiB (§39) always SlBn and »a©; also occasional forms like y'lT, S'Qi &c. along with the usual JJ'i'r &c. ^. In pause (§14bBrt ilSPi the clefts of the rock. §31. Masculines from n"b with two Vowels. § 31. A. Original ij (form sites §23) at the end of the word (Auslaut) becomes i, e. g. iJS afflictus, suffering, ip5 innocent, D^B? ip?; with afformatives n«5y, Qi*??. B. Original dj in Auslaut (I'lte often in poetry b. = STlte, e. g. 4* 8, 8) is modified in the st. abs. after 52 II, § 31. MASCCTLINES WITH TWO VOWELS FROM f1"'b. rejection of the J to e (n— ) (cf. ^btt); in the st. c. aj is contracted (§10/a) to e {T^-^)- Before suffixes and in tlie plur. this vowel is rejected (and with it, of course, the n by which it is marked in the consonantal text, §2&): n»n herdsman, isNJt n3>n, i^n, Q"'?"!, priJJi. iJ>n, ''?^) m''?'^) Dn''?"i» ^■iid with the first vowel changeable: n'^ffi, 'ji-iB? triiB, s^iw, isi'ite, axitt '''ito; disb {on\j pi.), NOTE. With DS probably iadkhem with short a-sound (Luzzatto § 884), cf. b'D^I, l=3a^ §24c. Before suffixes in the sing, the final sound of the stem (Stammauslaut) has often preserved itself in various shapes. Such forms look for the most part like plural forms, especially when the "> is written. That these, however, are no real plural forms is evident from the fact that some of the words in question are not found in the plural, either in the absolute or in the construct state. From naptt possessions in cattle, e. g. are found the foUg. forms: nSj?)?, D'lat? nDfJia, lifj)?, iri2j5» and !^^?|?tt, inifstt, ISifJa, a?5|3M and Q?"'?i:tt, Dn?j5l3 and OtiiJfp'a (but not: miqnim or: miqnS with "i-:-). So with nPB'a banquet, drinking, -fbiari nPtD'a, T'ljCla, DniniBtt; ns'in appearance, Q^'ib'^r; nssiB, ?r':»'ia, inK"il3, nxitt, ^i'^S'itt, 'jniiS'iia; probably also nb», leaf, CO//, leaves, Mirnb?, inb», nb» (nit-ib? Neh. 8, 15, only another orthography of Jib??). II; §§32 — 34. TEM. W. UNCHANGEABLE, ONE OR TWO CHANG. VOWELS. 53 Suffixes in the sing. : 3. m. almost always (not i, d. but) ^n.,, e. g. intott; but 3./". usu. rt^, e. g. fl'ite. § 32. Feminines with unchangeable Vow-§ 32. els. Paradigm see § 22. — Here belong also the feminines of masculines with a changeable vowel in the penultimate syllable § 23 (n^itlD from a^llD), since this vowel is always dropped ace. to §llcl; further the feminines from monosyllabic nouns with the final consonant doubled §26 (njJf from ph). § 33. Feminines with one changeable§ 33. Vowel.* Phonetic law §llcl. — SiSte (ground-form saphath) lip, edge, D*n nste, rtJiBW, du. D'^OSi?) 'T'fiBtoj I]?© iinBte, dnirisiB; nsp)», in^ niM, nisntt, DsiriipPi'a. — ns© sleep, dW» n?tj, ins©; rri? assembly, triy In several nouns, esp. those with prefixed tt, the 6. St. c. sg. is not dth, but with a helping vowel n-^, or n.., e.g. riDbaa, Di?rii3 nsH'?^; s^O?''?'?' ^?''9''?? nnsistt. With suff. ipis^tttt, inriBtJ'a (cf. isba, itiyT). Cf. § 36, esp. h. §84. Feminines with two changeable Vow-§ 34. els. In the st. dbs. of the sg. and pi. on account * The feminine ending here causes the tone to he moved for- ward one syllahle, so that the vocalisation coincides with that of -ar\ &a. 54 n, § 34. — § 35. PEM. or SEGH. FORMS FROM STR. STEMS. of the tone, which ace. to §llcl rests on the ending, the first of the two vowels has disappeared: sadaqa(th) np'is*, fiip'7?j l3ut appears again, usually, however, thinned to i, when the tone advances one syllable further: Q'^p^sn np^iE, ^l^l<1¥^ 'n tiip^s, *i5irii?is V. §llc2. b. If the word begins with K or n, the original a remains when the tone advances (cf. §255); n and y receive generally S^ghol. nia'l!* land, Qisnbn Dtt'lK, *i3n'a'i«, Dsinttiic, pi. niais lands; nbay cart, irtss, e. Even when only the second radical is a guttural, a has maintained itself under the first letter of the stem, cf. inni and niin? §25&, e. g. Tnsjq storm, d. Miscellaneous, a) Complete close of syllable as exception in st. c. of riD'na blessing, e. g. 'n fiS'lS, but ■"iriDia. Further: iTinn trembling, fear, c. Tf^yn. — P) n^na cattle, o^ibn nana, ^nana, isnana, n?rfl3na, niana, i?:: niana. 35. §35. Feminines of Segholate Forms from strong Stems. Cf. §28.— Since the two consonants closing the stem of the noun are always followed by an afformative — the feminine ending {malk, nsba a * Vocalisation coincides with that of bi^a'n &c. II, § 35. — § 36. FEMININE SEGHOLiTE FOEMS. 55 queen), the vowel of the stem remains unchanged in the sing. In the Plural a helping Qames, the retention or omission of which, as with the masc. segholate forms, is determined by §llc: niDbp for malakhdth, cf. DiDbtt. The st. c. and forms with suff. are not found in the plur. of this word; they must have been pronounced, with loose close of syllable: niabtt, "iniDbti, ODimisb'a.— Cf. nain destruction, pi. nia'inn ruins, pbwiT; ninin, tr'^nairi, dnininin. An original a appears in an unaccented shut 6. syllable sometimes as 1; cf. nto? agna with ilteas, DjiNn mteas, mteas, ■jskn nteas 21, 28.— n and j> in the same position at the beginning of the word receive instead of a or ? usually e: nS'in, fitih HJ?bn, ThyS,^ ^nb5» (b5»). Cf. §28/. Syllable completely closed, as exception: ns'irr c. reproach, ni&'nn, ^ri'iS'iin iniBin. § 36. Feminine Segholate Forms we call§ 36. such nouns as have the feminine ending M affixed not "' by means of a full vowel, but only of a helping vowel (^- or ^): mismart n"!ttT»a, ttkhacht nnDin. (Cf. §18cp.Y). Their inflexion coincides in the singular with that 6. of masc. segholate forms from strong stems, § 28: rrittO'a, SinitiCa, "iliinsiW; 0, however, when suffixes are added, becomes more frequently u, e. g. tni»H5, 56 IIj § 36. FEMININE SEGHOLATE FOBMS. brass, DnCTO, du. DiRTCns double chains, beside inbaba, inbaba. — Examples of the thinning of a to i: JTlsa mistress, ^Riaa, rtPilsa ; the inff. nso from a©:^, trh from lb;, n'l'i from n^'; (§68/"), m»a from ©55: iMTB, llFilb, iFill., DPCa. — S^ghol (cf. §28/i:) is found in the inf. of 5lbn, tiDb, DriDb (§680- c. In the plur. a is preserved, in the syllable before the tone, in most cases as a, e. g. niTSa©^; ^DStt knife, InibDS'a; irnnis capital (of a pillar), minb; ninsin; nsat:, nbaia. But irias, letter, p?. a&s. ni'ias. When the tone advances: Qln'Ta©a, ant niyai:. d. In the feminines of nouns inflected like IS;'"', a^'^ (§24?. als. nisns, -liy nistis, nnbriDa. t; \ ' : T ' T t; \ : g- Some nouns have besides the segholate forms a St. abs. in n— , which is in some cases much more frequent than the other: ITisy, also H*1S3|, assembly, Diiala STlSS;; fTiSSFi, also tinssri, ornament, beauty. II, § 36. — § 37. FEMININES IN VTS. AND ITH.— § 38. 57 bst'nte'^, tTii^Sl?, 'riFi'iSBFi, DSPlxsn; nb*« and nb;« hind, -intDn nb*x, nibjt?, nnten nibix; nanbtt (Inrnbtt) war (si. c. wanting), irittrtia, riittnbti, 'n niiaribtt, iiribnlsH; , nDNbtt f. mafakhd (fUDNb'a) business, work, nasbtt Several nouns have their st. abs. always in M— and ^• nevertheless form their st. c. after the analogy of the segholate forms : n, csinsn, rr^siasn, ni^s'-ay. T"' • -rr' • -it' ■ -rr' -I- §38. Nouns of peculiar Formation. §38. ,!riiiK ,15s SM/f. ; (c. ax 17, 4. 5 !) ^ySD lax ,father SX nias ,ni3x ;>?.—. (§22e) Dn'^as ,in''is and raif .DDTiiaii; ,^iriia» .ni^n (Jfttrj ,father-in-law [DH] ,iniriS5 and iinx ^irjinx ,''ri« sw/f. innas Tix ,brother tlij ,(§ Uf2) in« ,1ns jSiDr ''ns ,*Dins ;»/. — .oaim .dDinx ,'W!& ji'ins * In the st, abs. and before light suffixes thepl. has Da^. f. implir. 58 II, § 38. NOUHS OF PECnLIAR FORMATION. [niinx] pi. — .'risnins ."'O'i"^ il'"**!? ^117^ , sister ninsj .JTinittn jifflian ,Tnother-iii-law Tf\l2T\ ,D10 iTBSX ,(3) DiUJiX and DilBJS i?/. — .rtTBii? ,man TlJ^i? .'in''T»p« jrojs .-flab i«3 jQitpDja/.— .iinosijirMBs ,D'iaK mm , woman rnsiit .iinas; nintiK ,*nintts; i>/. — .^rintts ,iini3» ,maid niax ,pb«w ip!| ,**a''pa i)Z.— .?jn''|! ,D5'n3? nia ,house jn^i .Dsina ,!rj''ria jC^?? and iaa §20cp; p-^a ni 17, 17) pn-'iS ,son "ja .Dni?si ,!r]''5a ,bs!'itei. •':a jO'^sa jo/.— .?|3a ,^5a ,13a ,t3ib-rii:a ,ini3ai?/.— .osna ,1^3 ,nn-ria .daughter Pin .Qa''in5a ,?ii!n5a — .&i/. ■iba ,nh'3, j9/.— .(§30c) ?i-;b| ,n«ri5 ''ba oba ,vessel "^ba .aniba ,ib3 ,anr ,')'iisn la^M ,biaBn "i)? ,(§20ca) n'sj'^'ari ,water ***D';;a .D?itt© ,^i)a« jD'^aiBn "''aOI D'^UlSn ,heaven ***D';'bti .D?''i» jTi'i'ny ."laan 'iy$ ,Qi-\yi?/.— .^-iij> ,town /. TV * Instances from Aramaic and Arabic of the insertion of h in the plur. are given hy Noldeke, Sitzungsberichte der Berl. Akad. der Wiss. 1882, p. 1178. 1179. ** Pronounce hdtim, hate (exception to §6o). *** Plural with ending stripped of the tone, not Dual. II, § 38.— § 39. NUMERALS. 59 ,ti»n ''©«.'i ,a^m'^ p/.— .Qstjs-i ,^m^ ,head *^2j^i"l ■oniB ,d3''fe ,inii3 and lis OS suff'. ;'n ^fe ,mouth ns § 39. Numerals. IPS 1, st. c. nnx; /". nnx, §39. nns (.. §11/2) is an adj., e. ff. "ins DipM, mri!!? nana; "' rarely subst. : st. c. Diintn ^r!^?, Qil^rt nns. D*;!© 2, /. UiRO **, is, properly speaking, an ab- 6. stract subst.: the number two, couple. What is enumerated stands either in apposition: B'^IB D";?©, ■n"i5« D'tains, D''»3 ti"V\10, QiRO Diiy, or is subordinated in the genetive: d^sa "i?©, t3''«5 "iF)©, iniriBtSn iR©. The numerals from 3 to 10 are likewise abstract c. nouns with forms for the masc. and fem.; notice, however, that the masculine form is employed when the word enumerated is of the feminine gender, and vice versa. Maculine form Feminine form with fern, substs. : with maso. substs. : st. dbs. st. cstr. st. abs. st. cstr. ©b© 3 ©b© n©!:© 3 n©!:© * From ras, originally ra'S; hence plur. properly, aoo. to §28, r^'dStm, of. §l0c2. ** Daghei lene (contrary to §§5e.6a), because the punctuation presupposed the pronunciation eitajim, eSte. — Philippi, ZDMG. [Zeitsohrift d. deutsohen morgenland. Gesellschaft] XXXII, 85 ff. and H, Straok, ibid. XXXm, 301 f. may be compared. 60 II, § 39. NHMEKALS. Masculine form Feminine form ■with fem. i iubsts.: with masc. substs. : st. abs. St. estr. St. abs. St. cslr. ©ttn 5 w^a T • -! 5 ©© 6 TBlD T ■ 6 fll?« yac 7 syo nysTB 7 n?a« njb© 8 T 8 riDbo y«Pi 9 Sttpl T ; ■ 9 nscri ^W 10 ito n-iteS' 10 nii»» msb© ;ni8)a ob© ;dixd ©b© ;T»bT» d''1» ;n"'iy tibv d. In the composite numbers from 11 to 19, only the units from 3 to 9 come under the rule given in- §c. With masc. substs.: yen im»», ntes nns ii (82) -ito D-'DO 12 ites' niBbiB 13 T T T : nw ii^aix 14 ntes' niijan 15 T T T ■ -: ite» niBO 16 -\w nyato 17 T T T 1 • -iteynsbTC is -iffly ns>tn 19 With fem. substs.: nntey 'in©?, srito? mri!!? (31) niter DiniB nites tjbtt STitey ©an n'lte;* ©o n^tes »s© nntey nsb© rrito »©n e. NOTE. 1. The formerly perplexing numeral ''FipS is found in Assyrian as iStin. — 2. The units from 3 to 9 stand before ito in the st. abs. of the fem., before il^iciS in the st. c. of the maso. — II, § 39. NUMERALS. 61 3. The first unit stands in the st.c; the second aoc. to the KHhthh almost always in the st. abs., since "liUS Qi.2a and SlSOS fiiPBB are without a douht Q'^re perpetuum (§96) for '3 ''.Sia and 'S iFilIJ, each of which is found only four times in the consonantal text. Certain nouns frequently numbered (as tJ^S, ^bvt f- 1000, nB« cubit, 1)33 cattle, Di% T»S5, ns©, b;:i») usu- ally remain in the sing, after the numerals from 11 to 19, occasionally also after larger numbers (cf.Engl. "three pound ten", "five foot eight"), e. g. iwy nStpR 20 Diitey (i??. of liB?) ; 30 QiffibiB, 40 Diya-is, 50 ^. tiffittn, 60 n''iETB, 70 D^iJatiJ, 80 nisatj, 90 DiyiBri (thus pi. of the corresponding units). The noun numbered, when following the tens and undetermined, stands usu. in the sing. : "iiy Diffl©, but Diffl© niBN, as also nils'ia c-iy Di©W and rnsj D''?a«. — Karely Dp'^.l? D"'®'?'!! 18, 24 and such like. In numbers containing both tens and units either h. the units are placed first (esp. in the earlier books) or the tens as is usually done in English, e. g. 35 Qiffib©*! ©an, 33 obC'i n"'«b«. With a noun; Dint? ns© D11S01 5, 20; ns© Diyaffil D15© UJ'an 12, 4. 100 nxa; 200 D-ilnxa (§10c2); 300 nixa ©b© (and »• so on, as with rritey). — 1000 Ejb^; 2000 D':e1:k; 3000 DiBbs nob© ; 4000 niSbs n?31i? (and so on ace. to %c, col. 4). — 10000 nM"! (xopia?. 62 II, § 39. NUMERALS. D'lnx'a ,iBi« Dinxa ; ns© nsia ,01x135 nx» ,«is nxa .-t' - '-t'tt -:' ■■; t" * t ,nBx 5)^4? II .Qiffl'iB nixH ysTB ,n5« nisa yais ;Q"'^a'n ,nii>^a Qisbs ni»« ;DipiD D^&bs ,«isia"i fourth, iBittn (iffl'nr!) fifth, iffl© sixth, lyiaiB seventh, iJiHlB eighth, lyiffiPi ninth, i"\"'toy tenth. »»• The ordinals above 10 are wanting and in their stead the corresponding cardinal numbers are used: TT •■:-;' TT T!*: ' ITT "t;-; M. HOTE. In counting years and the days of the month the first ten ordinal numbers are often indicated hy t^e cardinals: vyirh "inxa "iTOX'^a in the first (month), on the first (day) of the month 8, 13. 0. To express fractional parts the feminines of the ordinal numbers above enumerated are most frequently employed : nioil?© third part, niyia-i V*, mffii'Dr! (nifflttn) 1/5, niffio Ve, myiauj V', miT*? and n^nitey V»o.— isn, lan 'A, »aS and sn-i V*, ©w Vs. P- Distributives: ni?lS DiiTB two each, nsnffl nJSW seven each. II, § 39. — § 40. PARTICLES WITH SUrPHES. — § 41. 63 -fold is expressed by the feminine dual of the q- corresponding cardinal: B'^nyans?, C.^^a©. C. PARTICLES (§§ 40—46). § 40. Particles with Suffixes. The particles §40. are joined to the suffixes of the noun. Deviations with respect to the union-vowel. Fre- 6. quently a, where the noun has o wa or Sere; even in pausal forms tf for ^ . — Din, IJi without a union- vowel when the stem ends in a consonant, v. §43/". — onfiy V. §43a G. 25,6; i^iytt since I am (alive) =all my life long 48, 15. § 41. -Negative Particles. 1, sb ou, negation §41- of an action: not; without a verb : no. 64 n, § 41. — § 42. INTEEEOGAIIVE PARTICLES. 2. iix (proply. subst., nothingness) negatives the being, existence of something or of somebody, hence joined not with verbs, but with nouns (participles): 'ilX Qi.tt there is no water. Generally in the st. c. at the head of the phrase: d'^tt IW onl? 'j'^x there is no bread and no water; but also: inis lis "ilnbl and there was no interpreter of it (the dream) 40, 8, cf. 19, 31. — With suff.: !?l5ii{ thou art not . . . (S'lii S^i^s thou knowest not), tfjix, D53''», DJiS; with verbal suff.: ■iliis I am not; isblis he is not, •l3i''S; isi^N we are not. 3. bK ^r\, ne, with the jussive (§47e), esp. with prohibitions and to express a wish that something may not happen: W^TitiPiperdes, JiniBn'bs ne per das. NOTE. ^N with Indicat. is rare; Bi3Pi-bx 19, 17, Ci"'to^ NS'^K 1 Sam. 25, 25, cf. Jos. 1, 7. 'i/ 121, 3. Prov. 3, 30. 4. "IS (always with Maqqeph) {at^, ne, esp. a) after expressions of fear, p)=that not, lest. 5. ipibab with the m/., not to. §42. g 42. Interrogative Particles. 1. Si, simple question, both when the answer is uncertain (ib Dibich does it go well with him?), and esp. (like num) when a negative answer is expected (^Dbs ins IXiilJlni am I my brother's keeper?). Also in an indirect question: DiBti l^ipn misnb to see if the waters had decreased 8, 8. — sbn nonne. a. II, § 42. — § 43. INDEPENDENT PREPOSITIONS. 65 NOTE. 1^ interrogativum receives: a) before non-gutturals b, with a vowel always: Chateph-Pdthaoh, hinisnil wilt thou destroy? 18, 28; ^ibrU wilt thou (f.) go? 24, 58.— 13') before non-gutturals with S»wa either: Pithaoh with foUg. Dag., 'iSferi 17, 17, nnjsSSBrt 18, 21, t|5a njhan 37, 32, or: Pdithach without foUg. Dag.,^!lB?an om^Xa '''3X do' I hide from A.? 18, 17, bnSTfl know ye? 29, 5, cl27, 38. 30, 15.— 7) before gutturals with Qavais: S'ghol (of. §11/^) Siann 24, 5. ■'Saxn.— 6) otherwise before gutturals: PAthaoh (w, Dag. forte implic), nx dsb 'liSfi have ye yet a brother? 2. DS, if, whether, in an indirect question. c. 3. DS . . ri, in a disjunctive question, direct (37, 8) d. and indirect (24, 21. 27, 21. 37, 32). 4. 153, n^a see ^Ue.f.—nth and nab' §45e6. «• 5. «;■ where? only in composition: iij? where is /"• he? D*s. ns^S where art thou? rCK where? — nt ^K T - TV - " - 1) where?, 2) which?; mtt ^K whence? nr, nST, «in, siSSt not unfrequently to give ani- ff- mation to the question: nt itt quisnam?; NiSi? ^la S'm^'s tandem? 27, 33; ln«rntt 3, 13. 12, 18. Questions are sometimes found without an- inter- ^• rogative particle, esp. questions of surprise; n| SlPii? *ltey 153 thou here art my son Esau? 27, 24; cf. 18, 12. 1 Sam. 25, 11. § 43. Independent Prepositions, -bs unto, |_ " ny till, b? over, ended originally in aj, hence often in poetry: ibs, 1*1?, ^b?. Before suffixes the fuller form is always employed; accordingly when joined H. S track, Hebr. Gramm.^ I. 5 6g II, § 43. IKDEPENDENT PREPOSITIONS. with suff. these preps, look like plurals* : ibi« ; Tiibx, ^ibs; rbx, ni^x; I5'^bs; ODibx, 'jDibs; Dn-ibs (defect. niiy; iDsiny!— iby; s^by, sibs>; i^by, n^by; is''bs>; nD"iby ; TV ' ' :• •• IT — T 1 .^. Y ' ' • - T T T T V T " T ' '.""-: on''^?) poet, itti'jy, inibs. 6- The follg. really stand in the plural before suffixes : I'lno round about, nni? behind, nnri under, instead of. — ^''aiat?, -f^aiap ; iiaiap, n'^a'^ap- Oftener: niniap, ''inin''3p round about me, &c.— More frequent than inx is I'nlns. With suff. always: I'ins behind me, ^iinns &c. ^irinn ; ^'innn; "iifinpi, niFinn; isiRriin; OD'^Finn; onintiF) and DI?fifl!i ^^!''ii!f7I!)• ^^^^ verbal suffix nsFinr) 2, 21. c. 113 between. 1513, T^i'^z, "1513. The suff. of the plur., however, are attached to the plur. : ^IDiS^ t3Dip3, Q!l''3i|l, to the fem. plur.: 13''rii:''|l, Dfli^iSi. d. D? with. iB»; ^'By, 5fB», /". fB^; iBy, t^B*; laay; 13373? ; Day (5), foniay. — For iiay oftener, esp. in the earlier period, i^iay (Bottcher §894, II). e. ns, -nx with: ins; ^ns, irnsii, /. trns; inx, J^ins; ii3ns; Dsns; dps. /■. ns, "ns (points out the determinate accus., §20e): 11ns me; ^ri^, iyns, /". Sfris; ins, rttis; wj*; nsri!*; nns, inns. Rarely Dnns (2) and fjlns. — Often written plene: iJiiS &c. * P. de Lagarde, Symmicta II, 101 — 103, Mittheilungen 231f. pronounces the forms in question to be real plurals. 11, § 44. "a. § 45. THE PREFIXES 3, 3, K 67 § 44. ))2, from, has preserved its independence §44. almost exclusively in the following cases: 1. often in poetry: la'^is-'j'a, I'a'jr)'^; 2. in most cases before the article: yisn-ltt, y:^rr)'u. — Elsewhere -jia coalesces with the following substantive to form one word: a) assimilation: d;;i + 'ja becomes '0^)2, Ql^'a, miaTO. In letters with sVa Daghes is sometimes omitted (§6/3), e. g. nbjf ttbtt from above ; p) when the following word begins with i, contraction to iM takes place; ^i'la^tt from thy right hand, S'CI I'll!; ; y) compensation length- ening before gutturals and n, e. g. ffiiXtt, T^J^^.' n?^i pnnia, before the article fliyritt; niniB see §9&; 8) be- fore n and n sometimes virtual doubling: 1^1)1)3, Wira 14, 23, niintt.— Poetical bye-form istt. With suffixes : D3'53, Qtitt, nsntt. Elsewhere doubled : 6. is'B'a from me; ^iBia, 'j'aM, /". ■f'stt; ^isaa from him, nsiatt from her; *)3ia'a from us. § 45. The Prefixes a, 3, b. The prepositions a §45. (in), b (sign of the dative) and the particle of com- parison 3 (as), because short proclitics, are always fused with the following word into one whole. The fuller forms, forming an independent word, iaa, ittb, il03 (but V. § ^O'^'^lCS)- e. With respect to the punctuation (cf. §11^'.^) note further : 1. before a vowel they have sVa: tTiaa, -fbrb, TTi3 ; 2. before a guttural with Chateph the correspond- ing short vowel: ib«a, 'i.t»''b5 45, 12), in the apodosis (G. 4, 12), in the protasis and apodosis Ortil "(lUnTilUn rt";^ if thou appointest darkness, then it will be night (§ 73) are denoted those verbs whose third radical is the same consonant as the second. 76 IIj § 49. VOICES OF THE VERB (COlfJUaATIONS). IV. Pu al, b?a (Quttal, bta);), passive of III. .e. V. HipKil, b^SSn (Hiqtil, biuj;n), active causa- tive stem, causative of I. 1. with personal object, indirectly causative: ya© hear, SiaiBn cause some one to hear; hence also declarative: p'^'ISH declare just; yon be wicked, ?iTDnfl declare guilty; 2. so that the act or condition denoted by the Qal becomes the ob- ject, directly causative*: T^aSn exert one's strength, show one's self strong, liptri become old, tji'itpri (denom. fromT»"iiB) put forth roots. — The same Hiph. has often both significations: "iST remember; T^STri a) cause some one to remember, put one in mind of, P) exercise me- mory one's self in regard to=mention something. VI. Hoptfal, b?sn (Hoqtal, btajsn), passive to V. /• VII. Hithpael, bSfinn (Hithqattel, btsprin), re- flexive intensive stem: 1. reflexive: IlKtin gird one's self, O'lptin sanctify one's self; 2. reciprocal: fS^tih. take counsel with another; 3. medial (sibi): -fbil go, •fb^ltiri go about for one's self, ambulare; 4. show one's self as, feign to be something: "iisyriti feign to be rich, IDCiltifl feign to be poor. ff. In addition to these, there are a few rarely occur- ring voices of which the most important, the Po'el, * Others: "internally transitive'' or "internally causative"- The usual specifications "intrans." or "as the Qal" are incorrect. II, § 49. — §50. LAWS OP V0CAL18AT. AND TOKE. § SI. END. OF THE PEBF. 77 Qotel, may be specially mentioned. bSiB, ilsip, the stem expressing end or motive, is formed by the in- sertion of t (originally a) after the first letter of the stem. Examples from strong verbs are few in number (Stade §158. Konig §26,1); more common from verbs y"y (§73c). § 50. Lavys of Vocalisation and Tone. §5*'- Phonetic laws. Cf. §Ilc.d'. To the law regulating the inflexion of the verb, viz: that before accented affor- matives beginning with a vowel* the vowel of the second radical, even when immediately preceding the tone, shall be reduced to SVa, we must note the following exceptions: 1. frequently before suffixes, V. %^%g\ 2. in pause before the fuller, and hence always accented, endings un andin, e.^.'jl'ap!:';, lipaiFi (cf.§14,6). Accentual laws, a) Always accented are: the last 6. syllable of the ground-form and the endings DP, in (§51). — P) Also the verbal endings n— , 1, i— (§§51. 52.53), except in: 1. the Hiph'il, 2. the verbs Y'», ''"y, y"y, 3. pausal forms, see §142a. — y) Unaccented are the endings Fi, ipi, 15; n:, ^. § 51. Endings of the Perfect. 3. sg. m. — jj § ^l- 3. sg. f. n — . The older tv-r always before suffixes, * The so-called union-vowel treated of in §79e is here, on practical grounds, also regarded as beginning the afformative (suffix). a. 78 III §51.— §52. ENDINaS OF THE IMPIV. §53. INFLEXION OF THE IMPJ . elsewhere rarely. II 3. pi. \ three times ii. Was it ori- ginally una (old plural ending of masc. nouns)? ^ 2. sg. m. n, also nn (cf. flPN). II 2. sg. f. n, some- times in K^thibh in, before suff. always n, iln (cf. aiti §15^/^). [ 2.p/. w. on, before suff. TO (DPS, Arabic «n^MOT).|| 2. j??. /. iri, no example with suffix. c. 1. sg. ipi (''D3S, change of D to M v. §22«). || 1. ;>/. 13 (cf. «»). §52. §52. Endings of the Imperative. I.sg.m. — | 2. s^. /. 1—;- (cf. « in a»• i?^- |! "■'''Pj? /"• ^i^I? »»• «fl'- In pause: *iVt3f5 ibb]? Intr.: ns^j'a© /. irrate m.^/. | "^niote /. nate /». s^^. In pause: Wn© iniaW ■^ AT : * AT ! . Imptv. always in a where the impf. has a, b. Before the endings In-;-, 1, i— , the characteristic c. vowel appears under the first radical. Loose close of syllable: Snains (§ 52c) write, I pray, a is always thin- ned to i: tjab, ''©ab, Wab, naati. So with 6 almost always before i-^ and "y § 73^). In the inf., imptv., and impf. the syllable hin [the c. aspirate to render audible the i that has been put before n, cf. Arab. VII 'inqdtdlaj has been prefixed to the stem, of which the 3 is regularly assimilated to the first radical: inf. bt:|5ri, imptv. btJjjrt, impf. bo^"; (with syncope of n, §10ti. (Cf. also n^3 §74/). Elsewhere this a has become e, per- haps influenced by the analogy of the vowel of the impf.: bep, nbap, ibtip; further b^a, rtb'na, 1*3|l», 1|W, Note the following: -i|'n, O^S, "ifes; na'^, DSS. In pause a remains unlengthened almost always II, § 60.— § 61. hiph'il and hoph'al. 85 before ip\, and often before ri, Fi, 15. E. ^.always "^Pi'iJ'l, In the other moods a of the first syllable of the g. stem remains unchanged, while the original ? of the second syllable has, through the influence of the tone, been lengthened to e: inf. bl^]?, imptv. btsp [Arab. qattit], impf. bt3j3'^, part. bt3)3tt. The preformative 12 employed in the formation of h. the participles of the Pi'el and all following voices is connected with the pronoun i^ (§16e). Part. Pi'el: bta)?'!? and nbBjSip (inflexion as in Qal).— i. Part. Pu'al: bajj'a, t]''bi3)?'a; mbajstt, trftaj?!?. The two purely passive conjugations have gener- k. ally neither imptv. nor inf. The only exceptions are: imptv. Hoph. Ez. 32, 19. Jer. 49, 8; inf. Pu. <{; 132, 1; inf. Hoph. ni|n (fr.lb;i §68c) G.40, 20, also Lev. 26, 43. Ez. 16, 4. 5. ' §61. V. Hiph'il and VI. Hoph'al, (Hiqtil and § ^*- Hoqtal). The first radical, which is vowelless, is pre- ceded by a vowel introduced by the aspirate rt. In the Hiph'il the verbal endings n— , 1, ''-r do h. not have the tone. The perf. Hiph'il had originally a in both syl- c. lables [Arab. 'aqtala\. The first a has always been thin- ned to I (but cf. §§65A-. 68cp. 69&. lirv^, SiteibDn 1 Sam. 25,7). The second a has maintained itself before end- 86 III § fil-— § 62. hithpa'el. ings beginning with a consonant, e. g. nbtSfJti, Dribt3}5ri> but elsewhere it has become i, perhaps influenced by the i of the impf. &c.: b^cijjn, nb''tiJ5n, li'^iajpn. (But cf. n)3i»n §74/-). d. In pause ISOTfsn &c. ; sometimes, however, a remains unlengthened. e- In the inf., impf., and part, the original i of the second radical is lengthened to % (Arab. impf. jaqtilu, part, muqtilun), doubtless from analogy of the vowel in Dip; (Hiph. l"y §716; cf. Stade §91, Konig I, 210): inf. bit:J:tl ; impf. bipp; and part, bippti with syncope of the n i^lOd). f. Normal lengthening to e only: in the ground-form of the imptv. biapn (Arab, 'aqtil), in the jussive (§47e) bt!p^ and before the unaccented afformative ni : imptv. njbt))?;! (impf. ni!:t2{5r), as it happens, does not occur). The lengthened imptv., however, is written nbipfsn. ff. u is frequently found in the Hoph'al instead of o; in the part, owing to the influence of the labial a u is, in fact, the usual vowel. E. g. HDbT&n as well as inpbcn ; part. 5rb©«. Cf. 3"s §67^. h. Part. Hiph'il; b''l2j3tt, D''l5''t2j5'a ; rttifstt, lnibitD]?iD.— Part. Hoph'al: btiptt ('a), D'^bafJlo; nb^jpti, nibcpJtt. §62. §62. VII. Hithpa'el (Hithqattel). Character- istics: Doubling of the second radical and the prefixing 11, § 62. — § 63. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. 87 of the syllable nn, the n of which is syncopated in the impf. and part. In prefixing the syllable nn the following rules b. are to be borne in mind: a) If the first radical is a dental (T-laut) the ti is assimilated, e. g. Ititaialn qui fnundandus est, na'ntt colloquens. Assimilation is also found in a few other cases, e. g. isasn prophetaverunt. P) If the first radical is a sibilant, in is inserted after this letter, and made like to it in respect of hardness (§3), e. g. -iiciB, IBPtpx I shall take heed; nno, nrinott hiding one's self; p'lS, p^Q^i we shall justify ourselves. NOTE. In the single example beginning with t, the 'n that is c. to he expected (of. Dan. 2, 9) has been completely assimilated to the t: 1S?fi purify yourselves (from Hit) laa. 1, 16. Inflexion as in the Pi'el. — But: a) Before nj A. (imptv., impf.) the second radical seems to have had a more frequently than e. — p) In the ground-form of the perf., imptv., and impf. d is frequently found in- stead of e, e. g. pTIitiri. — y) In pause e of the perf., imptv., and impf. becomes a (§14/p); e. g. iwrH perf., itonprin imptv., 5j^nri% w^pin^. impf. 8 63. Infinitive Absolute. In addition to the § 63. .. OS- ordinary inf. or inf. construct there is in Hebrew an infinitive absolute, which derives its name from the circumstance that it is usually subordinated to another verbal form as absolute object, and can neither 88 II> § 63. INFINITIVE ABSOLUTE. govern a genetive (suff.) nor be governed by a prepo- sition. 6. The inf. absol. bas d in the second syllable of the stem in I, II, rarely in III, and in the single example of IV (asa 40, 15); e for the most part in III, always in V, VI, VII.— Thus: I bitsj? (bbj?). II bbj??, bb^ri. Ill btt)?, rarely btsj:. IV biflj^-.V baj^n. VI btjjsn. Vllbtsprin. c. B. Use of the Infinitive Absolute. — With the finite verb: 1. It corresponds to the Latin gerund in do, e. g. Thus shall ye bless the children of Israel nnb nilQS Us dicendo Num. 6, 23 ; she sat down over against him ntOj? ''ints'as prt"!ene, nain (§74w8) multum faciendo=multutn 41, 49. d,. 2. With verbs from the same stem : a) immediately before the finite verb (only the negation stands gener- ally immediately after the inf., but see Gen. 3, 4. (]; 49, 8) it emphasizes, strengthens, e. g. nittln mitt thou shalt surely die 2, 17, liist'i iS"] we have clearly seen 26, 28; esp. in adversative sentences, e. g. ''3"]B'i. ib'^ i::ri|: sb niBb'i »; (§80 note a) (f* 118, 18; ^iloss 108 irjinittD sb nani we will bind thee, but kill thee we wiU not, Judges 15, 13. e. P) immediately after the verb it indicates the continuance, or the lasting effect of the action, e. g. II, § 63. — §64. WAW CONSECCTIVE. 89 litttf C^tii* saying continually Jer. .23, 17; taistj riB©''. he will always play the judge G. 19,9. Sometimes in such a way that another inf. is strengthened and a new idea added, e.g. aiuj^ xia^i )i!Xf\ it flew continually to and fro 8, 7 ; nbai riby ^iby they went up, weeping all the time 2 Sam. 15, 30. The new verb may also stand between the parts of the other verb: Qifirt la©*'! aitJI -fibtl T"!i»rt bya and the waters subsided gradually from off the earth 8, 3 ; najjn ?iDi1 Slibn D';)3!!? »©';l and A. moved gradually towards the south-land 12, 9. With the derived voices we often find the inf. A Qal, e. g. q'nb Ci'ntj 44, 28 and always trail nia; but also "ii^asa aba 40, is &c. § 64. Waw Consecutive. In the course of a§ °^ ° a. statement the Hebrew very often pictures to himself an act, which by the beginning of the sentence (impf. ; imptv. ; part, with nsri §472p ; a statement of time aiid such like) has been assigned to the future, as com- pleted; and in like manner, after an, act has, by the beginning of the sentence (esp. perf ), been designated as completed or past, he very often transfers himself to the time of its occurrence, i. e. to the time when it was still uncompleted. — This change in the point of view is indicated, particularly in prose, by the particle tvd (then), Warv consecutive. The term Warn cohversive is less appropriate: since generally a perf. 90 II, § 64. WAW CONSECUTIVE. with this Waw must be rendered by a verbal form of the future, and an impf. by an expression of the past, it was supposed that this Waw "converted" the signification of the perf. into that of the impf. and vice versa. NOTE. Specially noteworthy are fi^fjl, the "prophetic formula", and W1 the "narrative formula". — a) fl^fjl (properly "and it will come to pass", though often to be left untranslated), e. ff. fi^fjl ■'Sa'nrti ''NS&-'b3 and every one that findeth me will slay me 4, 14, of. 12, 12; very common in prophetical speech, esp. before speci- fications of time: d-^a^n ni'inxa n;fii. isa. 2, 2 &o.— 13) '^m (prop, "then it came to pass", likewise to be often left untranslated), e.^. aw*! . . WOIUS ''fyi^ and when he heard, (then) he left 39, 15 ; n&; D'^rtbxrt'l M^nW Di'ia'nn inx Wl and (it came to pass) after these things (that) God tempted 22, 1. I. Waw consecutive of the perfect has been weakened to 1, thus identical, as regards the vocali- sation, with Waw copulative. It is however clearly distinguished from the latter in many cases by the position of the tone in the following verbal form, the tone after Waw consec. being thrown forward on the last syllable — which finds a natural explanation in the similar function of the wa which, so to say, throws the act forward into the future. This advance of the tone has no effect on the vocalisation of the verbal form (§llcl does not come into operation). Examples : "^pntsS steti, ''as-'Trb ''P'7'!2*1 X3;« I will go out and (then) stand by my father's side 1 Sam. 19, 3; Pll'ay stetisti, U, § 64, WAW CONSECDTIVE. 91 Itil Pi'l'My'i xa go out and (then) stand on the mountain 1 Kings 19, 11 ; fi'l)3£?'i tj'ih "iHti to-morrow is new moon, then wilt thou be missed 1 Sam. 20, 18, DDbDS Bi^a QD'^r;? 1>1!?B2'1 Gr. 3, 5. The tone is not thrown forward: regularly a) in d. pause* : nyailDI PbsKI and thou shalt eat and be satis- ■^ T ! AT T J T ; - IT I fied Deut. 8^ 10; P) in the l.pl: we will go three days' journey into the wilderness and (then) sacrifice 1\b} IDnit'l 'la'Iiaa Ex. 8, 23 ; y) in the Hiph'il with the affor- matives n— and 1 : and it [the wild beast of the field] will destroy your cattle and make you few in number DDns n'[3''i'an'i DDniana-m nini"iDni Lev. 26, 22; — for the most part 8) when two tone-syllables would other- wise come together: when thou shalt come into the land and (then) shalt dwell therein rtS l^ati^ll Deut. 17, 14; e) in the Qal of verbs n"b and s"b: and I will blot out ■'niri'ai 7, 4, and thou shalt call his name iMT»"ns? lnX'i];i 17, 19; — often C) with the endings n-;- and 1 in the Qal and Niph'al of verbs l"? and S>"y, e. g. mbl and she will retire Isa. 11, 13 (from 110), but also inoi. II. Waw consecutive of the imp erf. (§e — ti) is «■ written: -1 (bbfp'il ; before Xwith compensation lengthen- ing bbpsil), e. g. : he died and they buried him 'llajs*'! * Sometimes also with other disjunctive accents: if 28, 1 iFilsuJasi, 1 Sam. 29, 8 ipiaHTfiJI (other exx. in Driver 2nd ed. §104). 92 III § 6*- WAW CONSECUTIVE. I'nii; and she watered the camels and I asked her nris bsMBsi 24, 47. T - : "."IT ' /". NOTE. The preformative'^ never receives Daghes (§6/iJ): iri'l, ^^s']^, m'si), iBO-;! ; but leay, 'latiFii. ^. The heavy prefix wa draws the tone to itself. This explains* the fact that the last syllable of the impf., when without afformatives, in many cases either loses the tone (of course only when the last syllable is an open one, cf. §13,9) or. is at least shortened (hence the impf. with Waw cons, is often orthograph- ically identical with the jussive). In pause the tone returns to the ultima. k. The 1. 5^. retains the tone on the last syllable and likewise remains otherwise unchanged: TittiBSl, •yibcsi and defective ifboxi; but ntt»»5, ^bo?l; ami, but aoil, from aoi (§68/) ; SiiiBSI and IBSI, but m»>1 ,§71x; DIBSI, but niB*1 (§72a.A. iiffli, ms'^i. ■»"y. aao, abi, aoh. Hiph. isi, is^i. With verbs n"b. Here the ending n-7- is in most n. cases thrown off, the form thus becoming identical with|the jussive (§74o— <). § 65. Guttural Verbs are verbs in which one ^ ' of the radicals is a guttural. Verbs x"b § 75 and a few i{"B § 66 present several deviations and are there- fore treated separately. In verbs n"b § 74 the n is only mater lectionis. Here, on the other hand, belong 94 II, § 65. GUTTURAL VERBS. the verbs ti"b, their n being a firm consonant, e. g. (rittR wonder) irraln, inrrill. — Phonetic laws §]0a. 6. I. Instead of Daghes forte either 1. lengthen- ing by way of compensation: always in the inf., imptv., impf. Niph'al, e. g. bt);?V 1t?S';], 11D!«!l, VaSv!3, lassri-bs?, also before n, e. g. OTp: ?fnsi bless, ^TlSKl, Xpl^'i often before s, e. g. fsttt'^!), IKS beautify; — or 2. virtual doubling: almost always with n, e. g. bitapl, trm, nnwba, and n, e. g. imptv. btfl)?: 'in'a, /. I'lri'a, DPiin'alP; in most cases withy, e.g. Wai^ terreUt, "iJliyi^ abominati sunt me, inf. aSRY ; frequently with it, e. g. ijBS? adulterati sunt, y^i revile, fva^^- c, NOTE. "■) Only exception perf. Pi. "iriX delay, but Qi'iriNa. | P) Exception Bin? lead, but b™*;, hrtya. || 7) Part, and impf. Pi. from asn fluctuate between Pathaoh and Qame?. || S) 'j'W Pi. always with short vowel. |1 e) Numerous examples to §6 — to be used, how- ever, with criticism — are given by Arnheim p. 126 — 135. d. II. Preference for the vowel a. 1. Pathach furt. (§4 *• nnx'i; ihx;::, inxn (§66, 6), p'ytf.;^^, wHx;^. P) Niph. andHiph. — Niph. perf. and part.: ?ffin:, k. acTO, irns; 5ic«s, rnxD, iws, ''niTS|5, nD;iin5;, before 96 III § 65. GUTTUKAL VEKBS. S'wa: nsDS: and ^iSDSJ.-Hiph.: )'^mn; "iiayn, T^B|05 NOTE. The original o (§596) under 3 of the Niph. is preserved in nxan: occuUavisti te 31, 27; y^Si tremendus ^ 89, 8 (alongside of I^'ISJ) and often niUS make, do (§74): ntoSJ, plnr. TOS?, part. ntosiVta'^i!??,?. hut 3. f. 'sg. perf. nrii^^s and nnto3. Y) When the tone adyances for —^ and -^ — often -^ and — — , e. g. impf. Qal IIIDln^ ilbriW, ''SBOX;:, 1Bp!S«5, 'in'ipSlil, along with l^lb'nri^ '^'iD«D; — Perf. Hiph. with Waw cons. : iPibDXri, ''nl^SKfil' '^'''?r?^v!» '^I'^i?^?!!?';?'! ; ■in'iayn, innasm ; niwn, wTayni, but iFiipTasn. III. SVa. — 1. Instead of SVa mob. genera,lly Chateph-Pathach. nnb'B)?: or^ltt?; nbtt^: njJHS ; ibtaps^^ : ibstpli; 'ibtspi: l-in'a'^v NOTE. Chdteph-S^ghol (§10a3): ^bx to speak, speak thou, (■iBX^ §10c3); ^3X eat thou, ^bN^ to eat. With the tone thrown forward : ilSH^-bsN to eat of it. SVa quiescens a) remains in an accented penult, e. g. innbtD, also before on, IFi, e. g. nnnbw, ll?!?'!";.— [3) Elsewhere in an unaccented syllable the pronun- ciation is in most case lightened by mekns of Chateph, cf. nbss, 5nnt{, 'T'ti?s?, D'ln,';; but also bians, ^tens;i, priS*']. Chateph also in 1. plur. perf., when the position of the tone is changed by suffixes, e. g. ISS'l"', !Tli?T we know thee, r|^3ln?T», niD?^©. Miscellaneous. 1. Position of the tone after Waw cons. V. §64/. 11, § 65,— § 66. VERBS K"S. 97 2. Verbs med. gutt.: a) Imptv. Qal nna, pi. Iins; r. V'^^^ ''p?,t, 1p?T; P) In Pi. of !|13 1 receives Chateph- Pathach instead of SVa, when the vowel of the 3 is accented, e. g. iiDiaii,!|D'iainni, but (L 72, 17iaWiain''i; Y) In ''b-pns;;) 21, 6 Chateph serves to lighten the pro- nunciation. 3. Verbs tert. gutt. : a) In an accented ultima, i. e. s esp. in the 2./". sg.perf., a helping-Pathach is inserted; the following n, however, retains Daghes and S*wa, e. 5'. Pibo)?: nn?©, Pitt)?';, P?a!7 (Hiph. of ys;). ^Tati 4, 23 for njy^ffi. — P) In (those forms of) the imptv., juss., impf. with Waw cons, of the Hiph'il (whose afformatives do not begin with a vowel) the second radical has a instead of e, e. g. buj?;^ : HM'], yaisr) ; yatj^i, nmDi; nban, s'lin (from y^l §68). But in the 1. sing. impf. ace. to §64A ?3teK1. — y) Part. fem. m— , e. g. nbtaj?, nils, nma, ynstt leprous, nynstt. § 66. Verbs s"b. Verbs beginning with s are§ ^^• verbs ^rm. gutt., see §65, esp. o. We have here to do with the inflexion of the impf. Qal in a few of these verbs. — In the impf. Qal s< quiesces in 6 which has been obscured from d {ja"khdl became jdkhdl, then jdkhdl). always in: \.'-\y&perire, iyik\ ^738% 113S^ PlJ'iasni. 2. bD« eat; !5^i«^ bss''; b?sh, bjsi^i. bass, bss; H. Straok, Hebr. Gramm.' I. 7 98 n, § 66.— § 67. VERBS 5"S. 3. ittX speak; iax% 1^t«i; IMS^i, 'Tas*!! [Job ch. 3—42, 1 iias^l]. nai*; las^ (also in pause); further two verbs that are also 1i,"b (§74) : 4. naxhe willing, na«i. 5. nsij bake, 3. »j. pi. *iBXi ; for the most part in: 6. tns seize: invh, trW"!]; 1. sfi'. TriSI (17 times o, 3 times ace. to §65?) ; rarely in: 7. fl&X gather, carry off (44 times as prim, gutt.; 3 times 3 : Clbh t]j 104,' 29, nSbk, 5)6*11, of. Konig I, 382 f.). [qb*5 from ^^l iDeloiigs to §68]. 6. nriX(§54rf), love, has in the 1. sg. 2nk (4) and t ^fj??, in the other forms always 3il5«'2 &o. (§65A). inx, 1. s^. "imi and I stayed 32, 5 (elsewhere PL, §65c). e. 4C of the stem is always dropped in the 1. sing, impf. Qal (bss, las), seldom in the other persons, cf. C)DX above and snan 2 Sam. 19, 14 for illaxri. ^'^" § 67. Verbs i"B. In verbs 2"b the 5, when pointed with s wa quiescens, is assimilated (§10^) to the second radical, e. g. bbjsi., but from bep (fall) bai.; biQpsn, bi&n. — But bbj?, inf. and imptv., bbs and hence inf. with !: Isasb (§5^p5 (remove), blBJ exuere, pTB3 (kiss), reject the 5. The forms that occur are: ©a, n«bn-«a 19, 9, n«a, ItJa, also ""©a, itja. — fins.— s-a (3); wo (4); b© (2) put off, nj3«|l 27, 26.-1^3 §«, Xtoi §76e.— But I'l'ii, ibSS, ans, Wt)5"l. The vowel of the Hoph'al denoting the passive is g. always — (§61fir), e. g. lan, IttJan, oais. n]3b, take, follows, except in the Niph'al (n]?!:?), A. the analogy of verbs 5"b (nSS): imptv. njj; inf. nn]?, with V. rin)?b (Pnp.b §65sa); impf. np-;, i>?. ^inj?-! (with- out Daghes, v. §6/3); Hoph. impf. njsr ms, give^ assimilates its last radical to the follow- %, ing n (§10^), e. g. Dfin?; 2. »«ffsc. s^. generally ;?/ewe npns; i.i?^. *)3re; ii^f- fiiD (foi" '2«0> suff. ippi; imptv. in), nsn, 13FI, W, 13P; impf. ^n-;; Niph. ■jn;; Hoph. only impf. iri^ Concerning doubly weak verbs like t^to, STBS; nu;, j;.. HM, nD3, np5, m»3 of. §76. 100 II, § 68. VERBS V'-3, § 68. . g gg_ yg j,|j g y/^gi j^^//g j_ (j^^g^gg^ originally Y'B). Verbs i"lD are those verbs whose first radical was originally 1 (lbi, Arab. walada\ cf. ib'i child 11, 30). This 1 (cf. §10e) has passed into "> in I, III, IV, and VII in part, but has maintained itself, protected by the prefor- mative of the voice, in II, V, VI, and VII in part, viz: i- 1. at the beginning of a syllable as a consonant: a) always in Niph'al: nb'i';, iTb^fi Di^ the day of his being born; P) sometimes in Hithp.: fTj^tiri confess, yTri«l3 45, 1 when he made himself known, ns^ti"! he will reason. — '15'^, lOtP, fT!, retain i in the Hithp. c- 2. at the end of a syllable as a vowel: a) fusion with the homogeneous vowel in the Hoph'al; bojjn, Tiin, "i^TO; P) contraction with the original a to o in Niph'al (§59&): TbiD natus est, 'ibii natus, and in the Hiph'il (§61c) libin genuit, libii, ibi''^ T^biia. NOTE. Iiif. Hoph. of lb^ witli assimilation of the "■ (at. §70) m|rt (§60/i:). In the Qal we find two modes of infiexion : d. 1. Impf. with the vowels i a: 1©^ sleep, inf. (with b) liiijib, impf lisix, liBisi, •ji2ji';v ], t»-i|i take possession of, possess {med. e, cf. nii»'!''1), inf. no-i (49; Judges 14, 15!|3ffil-;b), imptv.ffi'] (2), on and fnisni; impf. tj-iii, «'i'^':^ ,i51^ fear, imptv. N-i"!, impf. K'lii v. %76g. — In the same way are formed the impfs. of: Si3>i (med. e), »5|i. 11, § 68. VERBS 1"1S. 101 ly, fy\ (Inf. and imptv. are wanting). || — From li?J, found, inf. (with b) ib'^b. (Impf. and imptv. wanting). NOTE. "V be precious, impf. Igi'i and Ipii;, "ilsx— 1pi burn, e. impf. IpFl and Ip'i. 2. Impf. with the vowels i e,* or e a, (7 verhs) : atD^, /". sit, dwell; inf. n^ti, suff. iM«; imptv. aw, nai», ia«, in©; impf. a«^ ac«1, a«*1, aexi §64A.— So: '7b;',pepmY, genuit, impf. nbp), nbw (not in pause), np'ibFi; also Ty'^ descendit, imptv. 11, tTll, T\'-n;, impf. Ti^, "Tiljl, "iisi; for SS|i 2^. §76^. — And 3 verbs tert. or med. guit.: Tp^, know, n?'i, imptv. J>'n; impf. 3>i|i, yn^il, j>Tnl; Spi be sprained, impf. Sjjtjl^ 32, 26; 'm'' be united, impf. nnn 49, 6. NOTE. 1. Inf. sometimes in n-;- (cf. §556): ns? (often), irfi (4), 9'. ffTn-ia. II 2. Inf. abs., where it occurs, regularly : tli^lTJ, Sii;. H^S.^b; be able, inf. rtb'i, inf. abs. Vis^, impf. b?>|i. || 4. 2ni give; only imptv. art; go to I !i3ln (even when several persons are addressed, 11, 3. 4) and sibrj. Niph., 1. sing. impf. has always i: ©IJtli, ^IW. Cf. h. •fbri, go, in the inf., imptv., and impf. Qal and in «■ the Hiph'il follows the analogy of Ti'; : inf. Tdi (but with suffixes ipisb) ; imptv. ^b, riDb, iDb, ')3b,'l3b, njDb; impf. ifb;;, 5ib|;5, ^b>^, njnbr; ; Hiph. ifibin.— But irisbw, •fbninn. — Exceptions e. g. 1\bw^ &c., -fbnr). * e in the second syllable from original i ; cf. Arab, walada, impf. jdUdu. Cf. also 'Pi'i §67i. .69 a. 102 III §• fiS.— § 69. VEEBS Vis. § 70. -NrEEBS 2"^a. fc- NOTE. fi3^ age, come ! even when a female 19, 32 and several persons 31, 44 are addressed. § 69. Verbs i"is (i"b H. class, originally i"s). Qal. The imptv. is not found, inf. only IJa'^ Isa. 27, 11. — atJi be good, atsii. and at2i., 2U''^1; p?;; suck, pjii.. II Tpi awake, l^-pi"!, Tp^SI, but 9, 24 irpisi, || ©a^ (Arab. jaUsa) be dry, inf. TBI"; and 8, 7 mBa"^, impf. tjai, tjii^'i, ©ni^l ; Hiph. tjiain after the analogy of verbs i"is. 6. Hiph'il. Original aj (cf. §61c) is contracted to e: aiiain, aipiw, aiai;] &c. c. UOTE. Uncontraoted forms: WIp' Prov. 4, 25, "naifl make plain, imptv. "S were originally biliteral stems, at a later period lengthened and sharpened respectively. We feel bound however, for the present at least, to adhere to the view hitherto generally accepted. 104 II, § 71. VERBS VS. the third radical has heen doubled: bfij?, QMip (from qatvmem, cf. §60n-p before an immediately following K— hence also before mni (=i3"iK), e. g. 4' 3, 7 "n nalp, Isa. 44, 22 i^K naTO. f. Transitive Qal. (§ f.g.h).—\. In the perf. the vowel sound a, characteristic of the second radical, has com- pletely thrust out the 1 together with the preceding vowel: Bttj?, DPiap. The length of the vowel in the 3. m. sg. Dp is to be explained in the same way as the accentuation of the stem-syllable in 3. /". sg. nap and 3.p/. >iMp. II, § 71. VERBS V'J'. 105 2. Participles, a) Tbe act. part, n)? is to be ex- g. plained from the ground-form ofthe participle (cf.§58a, Arab, qdtil. — qdrvim, [qdm], qdm); fern. nisj;. — p) In the pass. part. Dip the obscure vowel of the passive (m) predominated. 3. In the other moods qwum became qum: Dip inf. h. and imptv., Dlp^ impf. (But inf. abs. Map: Dip). Intransitive Qal (med. e and o). — tva die, /. ntitt, i. ■2. nnr, 1. ipi'a, pi. irra, isn^; part, na mortuus, f. nna mortua; inf. nitt (abs. niB) ; imptv. tip (written defective) ; impf. nitiX || tiia be ashamed, niBia, 2, /". PWa, 1. intia; pi. 1©ia, l. IDOa (2. pi. had probably short o); part.jp/. D'''i»ia; imptv. i©3, im; impf. t5ia\ || nix shine, nk; imptv. /. i-jisc. Niph'al. — The vowel of the stem, which has be- Ic, come monosyllabic, is d in all the moods. Inf. and imptv. bcp^n: Dipn; impf. btJ|s'i: Dlpx Hiph'il. — Here 1 has been completely thrust out I. by the following heterogeneous vowel without being able to modify it, impf. Dip!; (Arab, juqimu)*. The vowel of the preformative syllable {%m—p). — m. 1. Owing to 1 being dropped as a consonant we have for the most part an open preformative syllable. * This ?-sound (cf. also part, mu^mtm) seems to have given rise to the ? in i>'^Bpr> in QTlI a^^ also in b^Bpri. Cf. §61c.e. 106 n, § 71. VERBS r'3. Accordingly when the latter is the syllable before the tone, it receives a long vowel: ct) a becomes a. bit?)??!: W'pn ; b'^pp^ : DiJJi ; Viapn : Dj^ri, and that not only where a is still preserved in the strong verb, but also where it is now thinned to t, as in Qal and Niph'al: impf. Qal bbfji. (§57 ^^t for the most part elsewhere {i. e., since no relevant instance of the impf. Niph. occurs, in the perf Niph. and Hiph., and in the impf. Qal and Hiph.), Exx.: mp'i^, njimpip; D'^pn, ''rii'Kj''j?n. NOTE. Is it likely that the parting-vowel is not, properly r. speaking, an inserted vowel, but the vocalic fiaal sound of the stem, "which has" been preserved (Konig I, 322), and is, in so far, ana- logous to the "union-vowel" (§§22d. 79e). In Arab, the vowel of the stem is shortened: 'dqama, 'aqamta. In the perf. Niph., at least when the tone is s. drawn forward by the parting-vowel, o of the stem- syllable becomes u: MbS he has retired, ijiawi. — In the 5 cases in which the tone advances two syllables (2. m. pi.) has maintained itself: 1S£0 they are scattered, Dlnisb?. The parting-vowel is sometimes omitted. The t. following examples show the changes thereby produced in the vowel of the stem. Impf. Qal injiatpri, ^ISiBp; perf. Hiph. '^nsisril have swung, pBSn thou hast swung; impf, Hiph. /". pi. njiSiSl^ they will bring, nsa«n they will bring back. NOTE. The parting- vowel is always omitted in the Hiph. of u. fiW, e. g. nFiart interfeeisti, "Vihf}, with the tone thrown forward nipart'i et interficiam earn, BP1'?l!; often in Xia § 76h. ]08 II, § 71.— § 72. VBEBS V'S. V. In the perf. Hiph. the stem-syllable has sometimes e for i notwithstanding the parting-vowel, esp. after Waw oonsec, e. g. inaipn, but n&p.lll and thou wilt raise up. w. Jussive. — Qal Dp;. Hiph. D)?;, tert. gutt. rrr^ (cf. §65sp). X. Waw cons. — Qal Dpjl, DJJJi; tert. gutt. or i: TO^l, 10 jn (exception Ijjl). Hiph. Dpiji ; tert. gutt. or 1 : m^l, 10*1. II But 1. sg. ace. to §64A Wp^^, Q|?'?3) Q'')?!$3- j^. Miscellaneous: a) fflS, rest, double Hiph'^il: nipn quiescere fecit, rii?;; &c.; nijin lay, throw down, nir, n?!!!]- II P) ^1'a circumcise. Niph'al bis?, p/. iVB3, part. pi. D-iVb?. ^_ § 72. Verbs i"j>. — Not a few V? stems allow their 1 to pass more or less frequently into 1 (cf. §10«?). Since the vowel of the stem-syllable adapts itself in such cases to the 1, the result is a number of forms which resemble shortened Hiph' il-forms and which are in fact by many regarded as such, e. g. 'j'^a he ob- served. — The stems referred to are: bun, go'ch, gul, dugh, ddn, tJ^M, bin, «in, l^b, nur, rubh, fflte, miS, 'tm, Sur, nitj.^ 6. Qal (§6 — e). — Perf. and part, as in Y'y, e. g. wa, ■"pba, T^, 15'i, a'l, na'n, D-^sa (part, pi.) &c. Part. pass. Dite 1 Sam. 9, 24. c. Perf. with t only 4 times: lia, injia (Dan.); MS'^n (Job); DilJi'i'l (Jer.). (?. In the other moods the follg. have in most cases i: § 72. VERES V'S. 109 impf-lia;;, juss. ^y^, Waw cons. ^a*1, inf. 'jia, imptv. T|i3, njii; so: bij;, iiTa, •jib'^P, a''^;', n^iB^T, Dii»;8, teite^s, 11©;;!^, fT^tiv A preference for u is shown by: biltl, impf. binn, imptv. ibiini, and tjin®, impf. TDin!;:, imptv. niBin. a) 'lil^ 6, 3 in another signf.— P) Inf. )>\V? (6), t^VV— T) In^- nniU^ 24, 63 along with niilJ^ tp 119, 148.— 8)' Inf. almost always DiliU.— e) Inf. only iUfe^.— 0't"""l>b K^thlbh, "iitt;^ Q^re.— t]) also iTsin. — 9) Inf. adverb. 12^ri <]; 90, 10. NOTE. Impfs. of the form y^'S.'' are either not at aU or only e. by their signification to be distinguished from impfs. Hiph'il. — 2. The inf. in i is also used as inf. absol.; of. however TW Isa. 22, 7, ah Jud. 11, 25, biia Neh. 8, 8, iuiia Isa. 61, 10. Niph'al, Hiph'il (Hoph'al) as in verbs l"»: pa; be f. intelligent; Hiph. inf. 'jiarj, impf. l^aX Polel &c. as in V'y (§71&). Only in a few verbs is i certainly the original ff- radical*: y^i denominative perf. from y''^ summer (to spend the summer) Isa. 18, 6. — Also the Pilpel babs (preserve, provide for) : ''nbaba'i, baba'^l, babas, the Polel ■jSip (lament, moan) from qin, and perhaps TT (boil, be proud), perf. 'Hr, impf. TT7; Hiph. n, b^tt, blfep, impf. 'js'iSC, tJlBlo':, !:>&';; inf. with a and suff. iM3>a 9, 14 (3 §6/3) merf. 1: ^"ittS, iq'i'is?- Pnal: bbn';, bbntt. Hithp.: isnn^ b>Bnn, D'anpi (p 18, 26. e. 2. Insertion of an unchangeable 6 after the first radical (of. Ill Arab, qdtala and §49^): Po'el, Poal, Hithpoel (orthographically identical with Polel &c., and inflected in the same way, §71&.c.). Examples: -- bbirr; he maketh fools of; bbin'a mad, ibbbn"; they will be mad; MiOJ? she will surround; issi'iri'^l struggled 25,22; bbiinnb 43,18. d. 3. Piipei : bba, ''ribaba, ibabann. e. A few verbs form their intensive stems in more than one of the ways just enumerated, sometimes with a difference of meaning, as bbtl"' he will praise, bbirr^ (§c); sometimes without, as nss"! thou hast destroyed, 1SS'';i'^;]. f. II. The other Voices. Main rule. The two identical consonants are contracted to one double consonant; the vowel of the second radical appears n, § 73. vEEBs s":s. Ill under the first. Owing to this shortening of the ver- bal stem, the endings n— , >), "i-^ remain unaccented (of. ^7 Id): nnn be terrified: perf.: m, f. nnn, pi. Wn ; aSD, inf. and imptv. 2b. The tone is thrown forward on the endings H — , >l — , '^—^\ g. often after Waw consec. §64(i£; frequently before a guttural, e. g. ai^SS 1s^ 1 Sam. 25, 10; sometimes also elsewhere, esp. S.pl. perf., e. g. \ 3, 2. 55, 22. 104, 24. Exceptions. In Qal the follg. are not contracted: h. a) the parts, and the inf. abs. in all cases: arib, TiiiJ, II'IIB ; 'liliB; P) the 3. perf. of transit, verbs inmost cases, esp. before suffixes: aao, 1230, "^SliaD; but also iS'^iao; - T ' -! IT • T 1 ' . - ' ■y) sometimes the inf. after b, e.^.TTSb 31, 19, but also Tib. Lengthening of the vowel of the stem-syllable, i. If the word ends with the double consonant, Daghes is dropped, a is not lengthened in such cases (§lle2). The stem-vowel of the Hiph'il appears as e {t impos- sible before the double consonant), e. g. bipjJln' ^'^^Tfi apn; often, esp. in the perf. i. pi. and 3. m. sg., as d: ISOri) p'^'v! he has cruslred. Vowel of the preformative syllable. As in fy ^• (§71»i — p). 1. a: Hiph. impf. n&^, inf. and imptv. "nsn ; Qal impf. ab';, Niph. perf. ap3. II 1. p : Hiph. perf. IBn, part. lE'KJ (of. QipB §71n). I 2.: Hoph'al apin, firm u. Parting-vowel. (Of. §71^ — v). To secure the i, distinct pronunciation of the double consonant a part- ing-vowel is inserted before the afformatives In and 5 112 II, § 73. VERBS 3"s. in all four voices (thus also in the Hoph. and in the perf. Qal): o in the perf., e (i— , -7-) in the impf. and * imptv. — and e of the stem-syllable with Daghes are then shortened to m and t, since a long vowel cannot stand in an unaccented firmly closed syllable. 0; Qal ■'niao, Dniap; Niph. iri'^;;5; Hiph. napn. e: Qal 130^, n3i|Di^ ; Hiph., ii^n;!, nr^riR. NOTE. Examples of the Hoph. with a parting-vowel do not occur. The unchangeahleneas of the u in the preformatives is attested by the part. f. pi. niaWa. m. Doubling by way of compensation. Since in forms without aiformatives the final letter is not ortho- graphically recognizable as a double consonant, the first radical is sometimes doubled, as if by way of com- pensation: thus besides ab;; we have DQi, ^f'^^, D'n*l; Hiph. impf. 303 and aB«1. This doubling is seldomfound in the plur. : VT^^^ (without Dag. in the 2. radical), iaB*1. — (In Aramaic this is the prevailing formation). n. Omission of the doubling. From the fact that the double consonant at the end of the word is neither in the spoken nor in the written form recognizable as such, we can understand how now and then the doub- ling is even elsewhere dispensed with. Qal impf. 3. pi. 'lab;;', Ittr they will devise 11, 6; 1. pi. 105, cohort, nab; [happens not to occur], nbas we will confound 11, 7; ' Probably; examples have not been preserved. II. § 73— § 74. VERBS ii"h. 113 Niph. perf. 3. /. sg. nBOD, nsS5 9, 19; 2. m.pl. tthfrii (ye pine away, are' wasted), afl!:tt:i 17, 11. Intransit. Qal. a) Perf. with o: laS 49, 23, from o. rabhobh. — p) Impf. serval times with the vowels erf (cf. na3''.)i ^sp. Ta^ he is bitter, b^»^ and I was despised, pi. '^^1^^/, nn;;, wn;;; »"i;: he will be wicked, »'i»'i, but ^)?*i!!? 1^5 4; tfi^ he will be tender; is;;, is^l and it was straitened [not to be derived from "iSi]; dttn 47, 19 from DIQIB. — y) Inf. DaiB3 in their erring 6, 3. Waw consec. ab";: M^;^; Hiph. ba^l. ij. § 74. Verbs n"b.— Verbs n"!? are really V'b. The §74. 1 shows itself a) in the part. pass. Qal: "wiba, a^n ni'^a© "' gladio captae 31, 26; P) sometimes before the endings n— , \ "i— , esp. in and before the pause: 'ji^rnpi bibent, 111JB5 ST' on my soul fleeth. A- : - T T T " NOTE. That several verbs had originally 1 as 3. radical is 6. still to he seen in a few isolated forms. Note esp. iblZJ tranquillus, iFil^ia together with 1"'^12Jt; also the Pi'lel formations: "1JK3 be he- coming, lovely (from MNi), part. hKJi? illlBai) like bowmen 21, 16 (from nna), and the frequently occurring ninREJn (§««£). In all other cases the third radical has lost its c. value as a consonant: either it coalesces with the preceding vowel or it is entirely dropped. In both cases n stands at the end of the word to indicate the long vowel (§2&).— Cf. also §31&. I. Coalescence of the i with the preceding vowel d. H. Strack, Hebr. Gramm.= I. 8 114 III § 74- T'EEBS n"K 1. e in the ground-form of the imptv. Qal, e. g. nsi, and, with orthographical retention of the "i, be- fore t\ and 5 of the passive perfects (Pu., Hoph. and mostly Niph.), e. g. lni?3?, '^riibw, ntii^a iussus es, ifiibrin I am exhausted. 2. i (almost always 1-7-) before n and 5 of the per- fect: a) always in that of the Qal: ''riNi'i, ti''^'], ''^litn. |j P) for the most part in the perfects of the other active voices and the Hithp.:lnit?3,W&3, 15163, 15ij30n,ri''3?nn; sometimes i, esp. in 1. sg.: fW^.p together with '^tW^ (8), "'l6"'"!Sni, in-lSsni., iniaini.. II y) always in the 1. pL Niph.: 13''b53; only exceptionally in the sing. !ni|?i'i then art thou clean, free 24, 8; II. Omission of the 1, with retention — in certain cases lengthening or (and) modification (Umlautung) — of the preceding (original) vowel : 1. In the ground-form of all perfs., bo^: ntey, nb3>; btajsj: ns-is; biaiyn: nban; so alsonb3 (§601, i»?w, 'pn*i, nnm, juss. b?\— i. s<7. teyxi, byxi (cf. §;> and §65^); but with suffixes ?lte»X1 12, 2. "When the verb is at the same time prim, gutt., the impf. of the Qal (except in the 1. sing.) is identical with that of the Hiph.: n^S^^Qal (cf. IbS'^), he will go up; Hiph. (cf. ^"^ap^ I'^aS'^) he will lead up. — 1. sg. Qal rtbSN, Hiph. rt^SK; but after Waw con- sec, both bSXI. NOTE 1. Notwithstanding the guttural at the beginning we find •W^, in*!, but plur. siSn*!.— 2. nifl, |-lin see §766.c.— 3. The very common 3. m. sg. impf. Qal of rtXI with Waw cons, is ifn^^l, the other apocopated forms of the impf. and the juss. aco. to §o5. 2. Niph'al: ban may she be uncovered; prim. gutt. X1\ xnsi, «"IX1; med. gutt. nB*l! 3. Intensive stems. Without compensation lengthen- ing (cf. §lle2) e. g. IS^I, bDil, ban*5 ; « also with med. gutt.: -iSW, "lyn-bs (although impf. Pi. H'lS'i). 4. HipKil: a) jjW'l, ]?iBm, i^n^l (as in Qal), juss. r^Bi. II p) with helping vowel ba?1, ']B*1, IBII, juss. S'lV jj y) prim. gutt. b?*5, bysv The apocope of the n— in the impf. is not un- frequently dispensed with : a) in the jussive, e. gr. ns'ilrn. II, § 74,— § 75. VEKBS it."h. 117 and let it appear 1, 9; — p) after Waw cons., esp. in the 1. sing., e. g. ns"!S?|i and K'iSi'i, and, though not exclusively, in the later books, e. g. !lPitJ';i, !l?2W, ninntj':;! &c. The indicative is used instead of the cohort, which v. occurs only three times {'^ll,i. 119, 117. Isa.41,23): D1S nteyj let us make ; srnbys I v^ill go up now ; nsb n)?TE3 (§68A:) 19, 32. Miscellaneous: a) In the forms without affor- w. matives the impf. has sometimes T\-^ for n-;:-, esp. in pause or when followed by s or y, from consider- ations of rhythm or euphony, e. g. ISiay ntoPi 26, 29. — P) Sometimes, particularly in the 3. m. sg., —^ appears as the vowel of the preformative in the perf. Hiph. (cf. §61c), e. g. nxin (5), nban (12) and fnbsn; be- fore suffixes DSin (3), ti;»in and ''p^in (9). In the other persons only: Jjitiitbn I have wearied theeMicah 6, 3, iriinisnn Deut. 34, 4. — y) Niph'al of nw see §65?. — 6) na^n is used adverbially: "much" "abundantly"; the feminine form na^ii serves as inf. absolute. — e) ninriTlJri, Hithpa lei from nnffi (§&) bow, fall down, 2. m. sg. n'^'iririTlJn ; impf. ninnffil, pi. 11r!r!«^ with Waw cons. sg. ^n^\'&'^ for wajjiUdchw, inwe^^ pi. liriFltisi. § 75. Verbs x"b.— The weak consonant X (cf. §75. §10c) can have neither a short vowel before it nor SVa (quiescens) under it. On the contrary &( has 118 Hi § '■5- VERBS 5t"b. always a long vowel before it as if the -syllable were an open one, e. g. bujJ: SS'a find, bttpD: J«S'a?; before n and S it is, in fact, entirely disregarded by the punctuation e. g. rib^j?: ln»SM, 13l=t?|3: <13X2H. Hence e in the intransitiTe perfects even before n and D, e. g. tsn: ST, nssn: nsT, wsjan: insbs. I"T "t't;-T T -t' -J-T ■ "T S is a guttural. Hence 1. preference for the a- sound, in the imptv. and impf. Qal: NSa, USTa^/, 2. not SVa mobile but Chateph, ?;'i!:i : ^'ato. Owing to the weakness of its guttural sound, however, x does not receive Pathach furtive: xsb, S^bs, i^'^isan. NOTE. The foUg. phenomena are also explained by the weak- ness of the X-sound: a) X is sometimes dropped, e. g. it^na 20, 6 for KViSna; ins; Job 1, 21=inN2';, irta Job 32, 18.— 13) S^wamob. is sometimes elided before N, and the vowel of S transferred to the foregoing consonant (cf. §10c2): IK^'^ (3), fear ye, from S^"', and, with X also rejected orthographically : iisarix 31, 39 for nsxenx, cf. below §e. Effects of the analogy of verbs n"b. — 1. Before n; S quiesces in S^ghol, e. g. n;i33ri : SlsS'ipn they will call, np'^jan : nssiS'SP, imptv. ni'iS'i : Ifn'q find ye (/.).— 2. In all the perfs. from Niph'al onward X quiesces before n and 5 in Sere: inibM: ''insa'as, ifiS^'a, ISIsi^H- NOTE to 2.: No example of the Pual occurs; of the Hoph'al only finxhrt Ezek. 40, 4. Nevertheless Konig I, 617 likewise de- fends the universality of the e-sound. Relationship of verbss{"b andn"b. Formsfrom verbs s"b are not unfrequently found inflected wholly n, § 75. — § 76. DOUBLY AND TEEBLT WEAK TOEBS. 119 or -partly after the analogy of verbs n"!;: a) wholly, e. g. nbDI 23, 6 from xbs refuse, withhold; p) with the vowels of n"b verbs, e. g. sph, ""insfe"!; 7) with the con- sonants, e. g. nB"! heal cp 60, 4, rt'D''. he will fill. On the other hand verbs n"b frequently follow the f. analogy of verbs s^b, e.g. S'lfs'i 49, 1, ISSIpJi. 42, 4, inKnipl 42, 38 from tTi]? meet. — np&I.Pi Job 5, 18 they will heal (from S&lj, but Isa. 13, 7 they will be slack (from r\tn). §76. Doubly and trebly weak Verbs. nSK, §'^' nss §66«; ms 7l2/(x; ^ns §67«. (T'n to be, ntTin, DtT'Ti; inf. absol. ITT, and iin: 6. inf. constr. tii''n; imptv. n;;n, "iiri, >iin; impf. n';in;;i, in*;, Waw cop. inil. (§ll5'2), in^l, ins;!, IP'T^- When forms beginning with a. Chateph have the prefixes a, 3, b, ^ attached to them, the latter receive the vowel i, and the first radical sVa quiescens: Dti'^ini, Piiinb, niifi^) lini, except T\yy). nTi live (after prefixes pointed like 'Pi'^li), Vlr^^'^T)), c. .n'^n and iin, T&'tt; imptv. n:;n;i, ■'•^n, i^ni; impf. n^ri;i, Til) ''"'^^ "^ni!!) "^ni?.!] ; Pi- '^1'^' and Hiph. n'jnin let live, revive, iniinn, iistTTin, nniTin, niinnb. II The verb iin— perf. in, with Waw consec. ini 3, 22 — which belongs to the verbs y"y is to be distinguished from the above. ;"b and n'^. — tlM stretch out, bend, initi;, iiisj, cZ. nw, iiBj, nt?:; impf. nsi., 'i:P}-bK, i2::i; Niph. iia?, to?':,- 120 II> § 76. DOUBLY AND TREBLY WEAK VERBS. Hiph. nian, Dnian, nta'te, nitsn!?; imptv. r\'^>'n and tan (§74w), lan ; impf. »o\, UR-bs, 0*l. f ilM Hiph. strike, pass. Hoph. (Niph. and Pu. rare); Niph. n35, Pu. iss; Hiph. nsn, inisn, wsn, i3n, n3'a,D''3tt; impf. nss, |»i; nsn, ninsri, ■'ti'^sn, niB, isn. || HDS, only Pi. try, iniB3, nsSM, niS?, D?, nSDS, 1B?i1. |: npD Niph. be innocent, un- punished; Pi. let go unpunished, declare innocent. Niph. n;?:, nn;??, ni;??'! 24, 8, inijss, njjsi.; Pi. w)??, n)?5i. 'ftlTO 1. forget, ''iniffl:; Hiph. n©:;; i5f? hath made me forget 41, 51*; 2. lend, 1«:, nws. e. s'b and s"b. — ii<15, Niph. and Hithp. Tupo'fYjTeueiv, riMi, xaanb, isasna; S3sn\ Cf. also §62&a. || i 18, 33; liteb who created me Job 31, 15. 32, 22, but also ii»y (cf. §31c) my creator Job 35, 10; i5»n he that seeth me (a pausal for e) Isa. 47, 10, but 3 times also ixi. Much more frequently its^Btt my deliverer tj^ 18, 3, -^3 "'SiSia every one that findeth me Gen. 4, 14, &c. § 79. The Verb with Suffixes.— II. Perfect, § '^^^ Imperfect and Imperative. The suffixes of the perf., impf. and imptv. denote (almost without ex- ception, cf. i5r\WS %do) the accus. of the personal pro- noun. This ace. may also be expressed by the particle nx (§43/) : 131'att<;5 and !)SPi5 '^•Ci1£l>^ and he kept us. This is especially the case when it is necessary to in- dicate the pronoun of the 2. plur. : "g does not occur at all as a verbal suffix, dD only once with the perf. (DD>l3D')a (j> 118, 26) and seven times with the impf. (Stade §635): the language avoided long forms; and in addition the affixing of DD and is to the 3. /. sg. and 3. pi. would have produced forms inadmissible in Hebrew (Konig I, 219). The ace. of the reflexive pronoun is not expressed j. by a suffix but by the reflexive stems (Niph. andHithp.) ; 124 II| § 79. THE VERr, WITH SUmXES. thus 'JISI'^ can signify only videbunt eas. — For the dative of the reflex, pron. we often find b (§45) with suffixes : nilBD in© ifab ib-nji'il and L. took unto him two wives 4, 19, onb ^injib IffiS-bs all that they had taken unto them 1 Sam. 30, 19. As regards its consonants the suffix of the verb is identical with that of the noun, except that in the noun the suff. of the 1. sing, is i, in the verb ni: "^bip, hut i3^si viderunt me, ''?'IK'1''_ videbunt me. — Suff. 3. m. pi. ia often in poetry, e. g. ittbna'i (p 2, 5 (§222£.A-a). With suffixes appended the verbal forms assume in part another form older than that which they now present when standing alone (cf. §§51 — 53): a) Perf. 3. /. sg. n— : 'isnsa, isnjjTnn. 2. /. sg. iri, gen. def. T\: ''?r>i^"1, IfTipriJ. 2. pi. !iPi: ^linibyn ye have brought us up Num. 20, 5. 21, 5, iDMS ye have fasted unto me (from D^S) Zech. 7, 5 seem to be the only examples : P) impf. and imptv. f. pi. ^.^Impf. : ipawriF) Job 19, 15, -yriDin Jer. 2, 19 {i.pl.) and i3Siri Cant. 1, 6 (2. pi.) are the only examples. I know no example of the imptv. (Cant. 2, 5 is followed by other masculine forms.) II, § 79. THE VERB WITH SUFFIXES. 125 Between suffixes beginning with a consonant and e. verbal forms that end with one there often* appears a vowel (before ^, indeed, generally only as a vocalic glide, SVa mobile; in pause ?;— ), the so-called union vowel, which has now got to be regarded as the rem- nant of a vocalic final sound that has more easily main- tained itself in the middle of a word, that is, before suffixes (cf. §2213, not even Hos. 12, 5 ilSKS??':, "Jj 12, 8 IS'^Sft. — y) Particles with verbal suffixes (also with Nun demonstr.) see § 40. — 3) The old plural ending 'dn (§51), which is also found at times before suffixes, is to be clearly distinguished from Nun demonstr., e. g. Prov. 1, 28 ijss'np^ 'iJSNSa':, iJJi'nnffi"). in. REMARKS ON SYNTAX (§§ 81-91). A. SYNTAX OF THE INDIVIDUAL PARTS OF SPEECH (§§ 81—84). § 81. §81. Pronoun. When a pronoun expressed by a suffix is to have special emphasis, the correspond- ing separate pronoun is in Hebrew employed for this purpose, and is generally placed after the suffix it is meant to emphasize, e. g. "^iS'Da ''??'!!5 bless me also 27, 34; nrin Q'iSt nns the memory of them (p 9, 7; ija 15S-D5 ""^b rrniE'i. '^^ D?n DS my heart too will rejoice Prov. 23, 15.— !?iins '^'T^ nRS tTllfT^. J., thee will thy brothers praise G. 49, 8. — In the same way also: '^-'iT. i<1!l"Da nicbl and to Seth too 4, 26, cf. 10, 21. § 82. § 82. Superlative and Comparative. — The superlative is periphrastically expressed by the article placed before the adjective to be compared, or by a genetive after it, e. g. 'jbjjn the youngest (smallest) 42, 13 ; "Ws. Ibp the youngest of his sons. 6. The comparative is expressed in the same way by ■jTa; a) with adjectives, e. g. niiipfeti napn naitJ wisdom is Ill, § 82. — § 83. VERES WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 129 better than pearls; 'liaaa u^m sflK niu a man slow to anger is better than one that is mighty; -^3)3 TthSt Q»n 1 Sam. 9, 2. — Sitelti 131? bina my sin is too great for me to bear* Gen. 4, 13. — || P) with verbs, e. g. i3lQ)3 niJ'lS she is more righteous than I 38, 26 ; sns Tija'^Bia Sjoi'^'ni? he loved Joseph more than all his other sons 37, 3, cf. 29, 30. — Dilonn-bSM ''P)3bj3 I am too insignificant for all the mercies 32, 11. When the adjective is not immediately followed c. by the object (or person) compared with 'jr, the em- phasis implied in the comparative is expressed by the article alone, e. g. b'lari liSBri the greater light, '^an Ibjjn the lesser light 1, 16, bhart WS her elder son [be- cause Rebecca had only two sons] 27, 15. § 83. Verbs with the Accusative. — Accu-'§ ^3. a. sativus etymologicus: 'rriB I'lriB DlB (p 14, 5; py2*;l trnttl nb^a Jljjys he wept loud and bitterly G. 27, 34; cf. vixTjv (xsYd^Tjv vixav &c. The following are construed with the ace, differ- 6. ing thereby from the English construction: 1) regu- larly verbs that eipress a state of being clothed, full and such 'like, or their contraries, e. g. Rffinb lini lin with grandeur and glory art thou robed if 104, 1 ; sbie'^. «)5iS pinto our mouth will be full of laughter ; Dnb isaton * Cf. Latin maior sum guam cui possit fortuna nocere. H. Straok , Hebr. Gramm.^ I. 9 130 III, § 83. VERBS WITH THE AOCtTSATIVE. ye shall be satisfied with bread Ex. 16, 12; Fi'ipn sb na*! thou hast not lacked anything Deut. 2, 7 cf. (j; 34, 11. G. 18, 28 ; D5''3l»-Da bsm rva) wherefore should I lose you both 27, 45. 2) Frequently verbs of going or coming to a place. «ia with a or -bs, but also with n— locale (§20), e. g. rra'^ns)? to Egypt 12, 11, or with the simple ace, e. g. ^'^yriS 1S3 to his gates <^ 100, 4; hence the part, with the gen.: i"|i5-^»tj i^a that went in to the gate of his city G. 23, 10. — ^bn, generally with -bs? or b; but also: niin to Haran 28, 10, niisn to the field r T T ' ' V T - 27, 5. 3) seldom verbs of dwelling (in, at a place), iffi^, usually with 3 13, 12 and often; but also: bn« atii n?j5tt1 in tents and with herds 4, 20, bK'ltei. nibflft ntiii enthroned upon the praises of Israel if 22, 4, of. Din'^sn affii (j^ so, 2.— -ia© usually with a, e. ^. pttj-ii DtJ-'bnsa 9, 27, cf. 14, 13 ; seldom !Ti*i2n pOi. «}j 65, 5. 4) A few individual constructions may be noted: CjSa commit adultery with, ^ys serve, njy answer &c. Two accusatives may stand: 1) after the causa- tive voices of all verbs that govern one accusative in the Qal, e. g. yaa, Tl2l^|? sbia fill thy horn with oil 1 Sam. 16, 1 ; ffilC-i'l5i2 ins «ab*5 had him clothed in vestures of cotton G. 41,42; iMM-ns ^Dii-ns lai'OB''! they stripped J. of his coat 37, 23 ; ^^pn IpM 13»ai» in, § 83. VERBS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 131 ({> 90, 14; nnb yistex nwa» «^ 132, 15; im libDs;^ -iia Num. 11, 18. — So too, of course, after those Pi'el and Hiph'il formations with a like signification, of which no Qal occurs in a simple transitive sense, e. g. iifjon water, give to drink (§77), X'^_ IJ-'as-nx njjC? 19, 32; Dlttffi nb'ia ^^Dlii"! and may he bless thee with the blessings of heaven 49, 25. 2) sometimes after Qal formations with meanings g. corresponding to the above, e. g. 1''PiD5ap UJiT^m ]OT. with corn and wine have I sustained him 27, 37, cf. (p51,14; n»D Judg. 19, 5; laT to present with G. 30, 20; ■jja© ^TO'a (p 45, 8; i:*lMp nN5to I'li'l they have sur- rounded me with . . (j; 109, 3. — Generally after bttS do something to some one, e. g. ^['^lA nS"! evil have they done unto thee G. 50, 17, cf. v. 15. 1 Sam. 24, 18. 3) To make or appoint some person (or thing) to h. be something, e. g. iniBSF) D'^sp [with] chambers shalt thou make it (the ark) 6, 14, v. 16. 27, 9; liian-as? irjinn: Q-iia 17, 5 (but cf. b v. 5. 20); i^b rv-da iiaa in 27,37. — Also the material dut of which something is made frequently stands in the ace, sometimes even after the verb, e. g. and God formed man l&y of dust 2, 7. 4) The epexegetical accusative, e. g'. la'^S-bSTiN Jnisn i- iftb thou smotest them, on the jaw (i. e. thou smotest their jaw) t{j 3, 8 ; ©25 *is35 Sfb we will not slay him G. 37, 21. 9* 132 in, § 83. — § 84. UNION OF TWO VERES. Ic. With passive verbs the logical object sometimes stands in the accusative (to be approximately rendered in English by the indefinite "they", Germ, man), e. g. Ti'^S-nx ^risnb "ivfy and unto Enoch they bore Irad 4, 18; D-iai* ?iaTB-ni|i lis XliJi-S'b they shall not call thy name any more Abram 17, 5; of. 21, 5. 8. 27, 42. 40, 20. §84. §84. Union of two Verbs to express a a. single Idea. In the Hebrew language which has comparatively few adjectives there is also but a small number of adverbs, and hence the notion expressed by a verb is often more precisely determined by an additional verb instead of by an adverb*. Note par- ticularly: nitj again; 5|D^, t|ipin once more; in^ hur- riedly; S'lpTi well; malln much. Examples in the sequel. 6. Verbs that express, whether by themselves or with other words, only the modality or nearer definition of an action are followed by the main idea 1) gener- ally in the inf. with V. nas, ffijsa, b'ln, bnn (begin), fst) (desire, be inclined), bb^, qo'; and Sjipin, nb3 (finish), IXM, ina, nain. Examples: nsbb nasn sb 24, 5; b^n IJspb 41,49, cf. 11, 8; nhb onsin bnn began to multiply 6, 1, cf. bmn 4, 26; nnbb t|Dri1 she bare yet again 4, 2; * Cf. Prencli: /ai failli mourir'l had almost died; vient de paraitre just out. Ill, § 84. UNION OF TWO VKKBS. 133 ISz) n>3 IffiSS 18, 33; 82ilab p^ryn thou hast found quickly 27, 20, cf. 18, 7. 41, 32; b^&tin!: nna-in she has prayed much 1 Sam. 1, 12, cf. ^ 78, 38; iniaMfl niS'lis ib^iBlBBn na»b who is throned on high but looketh deep down <\) 113, 5. 6 [i— z;. §506]. 2) Not unfrequently in the inf. without b. E. rj.: c. ^^:!4 ^^^ to magnify thee Jos. 3, 7; di^n S3 'JPi'in'a ?1'ntt how are ye come so early to-day? Ex. 2, 18; IBpi^l inj« Xbte W then they hated him yet the more Gen. 37, 5. NOTE, a) That the inf. occurs more frequently with than d. without b may be seen from the following data : rtax with b 29 times, simple inf. 9 times [Deut. 4, Sam. 1, Kg. 1, Isa. 2, Job 1]; Bisa with ^ 19 times, inf. only iniari Ex. 4, 24. Jer. 26, 21; intl with i 9, ■,■; 3 times, inf. only Isa. 1, 16; ySn usually with b, inf. without b only 3 times; ^b'j with )> 120, inf. 26^; t|b;; with b 13, inf. 1; fflitjifl with i 63, inf. 24, Waw and finite verb {v. §e) 12; ni3 with i 42, "ia 7, with simple inf. not at all; "iXp with i 31, inf. 8. — (3) In the case of some Verbs both constructions are about equally common, e.g. 'lib a''B"ia 12J1K a man skilled in playing, )ii (imptv.) W^Hin play sweetly. 3) As a finite verb with Waw. Particularly often e. after 3^1®, e. g. isn^l SlB«1 and he digged again 26, 18; rt!3lB'='l aiBil and he sent again 2 Kings 1, 13. Other examples : niBS n|j»J QSi'ias SjO^'j and Ah. took again a wife G. 25, 1 ; i3S-bs ^ibyt! I'lr!^ go up in haste to my father 45, 9, cf. V. 13. 24, 18. 20; IIPil inioni 1 Sam. 25, 23. 4) As a finite verb without Waw. E. g. n^'iS na^lBS !ri;ss I will again feed thy sheep 30, 31 ; ttb'an "inia 134 nl, § 84. — § 85. KOMINAL AND VERBAL SENTENCES. make haste to save thyself 19, 22; l-ito^a ^insffi lint; ^ 106, 13; ijiStt "iDDSi? I'lJi purify me throughly 4* 51, 4. B. THE SENTENCE IN GENERAL. (§§ 85—86). ^5- § 85. Distinction between Nominal and Verbal Sentences. I. A verbal sentence begins with a finite verb. Since the latter in Hebrew already contains its sub- ject within itself (JjtD&S-m ibTB"^ he will . .), whatever follows to indicate the subject has really an appo- sitional character, e. a. bsiiB'' 'ITSTD llljii Kbl D15"' mb he " -■ T ! • " ' AT ■ 1 T slumbers not and sleeps not, (namely) Israel's keeper. b. Usual order: (negation), verb, (subject), object, OMn pKn nsibH (cf. §836) 6, 13. — Deviations of vari- ous sorts occur when special emphasis rests on any member of the sentence, e. g. precedence of the ob- ject: fnsjn Sisbtt 'n tinpn of thy loving kindness, Jahwe, is the earth full. c. II. The nominal sentence. A. The simple nominal sentence consists of subject (subst. or pron.) and pre- dicate (subst., adj. or part.). There is in Hebrew no special expression for the copula (am, art, is, &c.).* * The separate pronoun of the 3. person frequently serves to give emphasis to the subject, in which case it seems to take HI, § 85. — 86. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 135 Usual order: Subject, predicate; e. g. ISSbtt 'Pl J. is our king, DDirfbs iSS; I am your God, i^iptj 'n. But, when it is meant to give special emphasis to the pre- dicate: nPS l&y dust art thou 3, 19. T ~ T T ' An adjective in the predicate stands generally be- Slten Sb D^xn ijiy Prov. 27, 20. */ T : - 1 • T T IT " " ' 2) Oonstructio ad sensum. a) With singular subjs. c. that contain a collective notion the verb often appears the place of the copula. Examples: n^S Nin "'Sin'ifl "nfJBii the fourth stream (it) is the Euphrates 2, 14, of. 9, 18; ix'soi^^ -^iS dn Inibx 25, 16; art b"a"i niBblU 6"'S"liSil ™^P the three branches, three days are they, i. e.: the three branches are three days 40, 12, cf. 40, 18. 41, 26. 34, 21. 136 III, § 86. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. in the plur., e. g.^'iiAt}'^^ 'rva 'IKT^ ^.U the world shall fear before Jahwe;] tTliini-ffiiil: ^iTas^:! Judg. 15, 10. — P) Sing, with nouns that have a plural form but de- note only a unity (§19^^ 27, 29. In this and similar expressions (especially when the plural subj. is a part.) the sing, of the pred. is to be explained as distributive (each of them, every one that). 4) The verbal predicate when standing at the be- ginning of the sentence often remains in the masc. sing., e. g. tnhiJia ''ri'i let there be luminaries 1, 14; i;inrisT» s'^an itps ns'iari (for ns-'in) i Sam. 25, 27. Cf. (j; 57, 2. 124, 5. NOTE. It is found in a very few cases in the masc. plur. be- fore the fem. plur., e. g. Dniasi? te'i'^ i|i 16, 4. * Feminine in a neuter sense; cf. §18a ; Greek xa zaxa yi- III. § 86 § 87. EELATIVE SENTENCES. 137 5) If the subject consists of a noun with a follow- h. ing genetive the predicate frequently agrees with the gen. when the latter contains the main idea, e. g. niBp O'lpiri d''li35 the bows of the heroes are broken 1 Sam. 2, 4. 6) If the predicate belongs to several subjects i. connected by 1 "and", it stands in the plural when following them {e. g. 8, 22) ; when preceding them not unfrequently in the sing., e. g. ifflM inttSil rja*! tt Shjl nann-!:!* ins i\3a 7, 7 ; nbttten-n^ ns^i^ ow nj^^i 9, 23 ; niib^i nsb-DS ©ami 33, 7. 0. PAETICULAR KINDS OF SENTENCES. (§§ 87-91). § 87. Relative Sentences. Chief characteristic :§ 87. Relative sentences are introduced by the sign of rela- tion "ittJS (§ 16d).* Otherwise their construction is in the main that of independent sentences. Examples: sib» isa, relat. sibx 1X3 ^m Diffissn 19, 5: m»s nm^?^ rt'^S'tlK nilSB the earth which has opened its mouth 4, 1 1 ; «in irrnti sib -iibs n^anan 7, 2 ; di^w? nisia ?i'^t?*'¥'ir' I have brought thee out of Ur Kasdim. 'in '!©» 'n i:!* 's '"a I am Jahwe, that brought thee out &c. 15, 7; * In the language of the poets we find also >IT (ij^ 9, 16. 142, 4) and n (t|i 74, 2. 78, 54. 108, 8) used to introduce relative sentences. Cf. Deiitzsch on Isa. 43, 21. 138 IIIj § S7- KliLATIVE SENTENCES. TiS DniD'a, rel. irii{ '12 "ii»« qor 13s I am Joseph, whom ye sold 45,4; aib ina a©;~n»X O'^l^n the towns in which Lot had dwelt 19, 29; IttS IttN (§9&) nyiTl rjibi* the maiden to whom I shall say 24, 14; IIBS i3'Ti n-^b^ 5fbri ipii? my way, which I go 24, 42 ; -^ffis nipBn n© Ttty the place where he had stood 19, 27; y'ltjin nUJ'a !ni«S:i— itJX the land from which thou art gone out; T • T T T V -: ^ nafc Siaj "IBS Dipiaf] the place whither we shall come 20, 13; T3Bb inDbninn-"n»!* 'n Jahwe, before whom (in whose sight) I have walked 24, 40, cf. 48, 15 ; -iiBS T^ns ■'Iffit"! iT"by his brother, on whose hand was the scarlet thread 38, 30; iiBBS JTlS IS^S'l ^m ISinif our brother whose anguish of soul we saw 42, 21. b- NOTE. The examples given above show that the word ex- pressing the more precise reference of the relative particle is pre- ferably separated from IffiX. But of. ■jT^'!? ^^"^'^^. T?'^"^? every tree on which is the fruit of a tree 1, 29; the land of Hawila anjii bia-^iBX 2, ii; rt'ny ft-ia?x la^x 34, u. (,. The complement oft he relative par tide is omitted: a) always when it would be a pronoun in the nom. case. E. g. t!q ins they (are) with him; inii! ItBSi DiDbian the kings that (are, were) with him 14, 5 ; yip'ib byq ^m d'^^n 1, 7 ; ]|n ijina '^m pn 3, 3 ; y'15': f"isfa-im bis 6, 18. (I. NOTE. Exceptions sometimes in negative sentences: "^3 Vs Vfin ?jS'nW K^ ^BX 13^ every stranger, who is not of thy seed 17, 12, cf. 7, 2; very rarely in positive sentences: "IICX iiJall'te "irrxin 9, 3 C^n adj.). In these cases the pron. is to he explained Ill, § 87. RELATIVE SENTENCES. 139 acc. to §85c note. In a -verbal sentence the complement is found only in 2 Kings 22, 13 (Konig I, 136). p) In most cases, when it would be a pronoun e. in the accusative: isi 10S Qisn which he had formed ATT V -■ T T IT 2, 8; ntey ^m 'nrjW'n t^^n the beast of the field which he had made 3, 1 ; ins'^a 10» tn»T\ which I have ' • T T V -: T T rr created 6, 7 ; *fSl» ntijn ■p-'isn the land which I shall show thee 12, 1, cf. 15, 14. 17, 21. 19, 19. 20, 3. 25, 10 &c —Exceptions in the Gen. only: ini* 13'^ 1t?» ISisn Qin'bs the set time which God had announced 21, 2; nj^ab (§222C) 21, 29; 'n iD'n|i im nnto ni^ the smell of the field which J. has blessed 27, 27 (otherwise v. 41!); iris DFi'lDB ^m 45, 4 (w. §a). Y) In many cases where the complement would f. be a preposition with a suffix, a locative particle or such like. Examples: ins la'TliBit dipira in the place where he had spoken with him -35, 13. 14 (v. 15 DipBD d^irbs Dffi ins iai i»s«); «i'in-p« im tjiiti ©an 'Tiy T'SJjl yet five years in which there will be no plough- ing and no harvesting 45, 6. Here, probably, belong also such passages as: inlla'n IIBS lisri the city of which thou hast spoken 19, 21, DPi'n'as IffiS D?ias43, 27. "IIBS frequently stands for "he who", "that which", g. In this case the preposition that ought to have stood before the pronoun omitted is placed immediately before the relative particle. Examples: 'n li'^ys 5>'i^1 140 nil § 87- EELATIVE SENTEKCE3. ntoy ItpS and that which he did was evil in the eyes of J. 38, lOi'ins ibx 1-na«n "^m^ and that what ye shall say untomeIwillgive34, 11, cf. 18, 17. 39,23. 41,55; iii nito""n»X ns naO that, which thou hast done to him 27, 45, cf. 9, 24. 28, 15; ^inp^b . . 'T'ya-im nsi and that which was in the city they took away 34, 28; inia-b? 'itisb "iiai^h and he said to him who was (set) over his house, /. e. to his ' house-steward 43, 16, cf. 44, 4 ; QDipaa ITSSbl and for those that are in your houses 47, 24; hearken unto me tflnS n^sa "^rx Iffisb in regard to that which I command thee 27, 8; IJinsb ICSttl and he hath got all of that which was our father's 31, 1; make them chief herdsmen ib"1lt5S"by over that (the cattle) which is mine 47, 6 ; na» "^b-ni^n;! ins SSB"; "^m he with whom it (the cup) is found shall be my bondman 44, 10. h. The construct state is found a few times before the sentence introduced by 1iB8 (cf. §21A): TOs; dipa the place where . . 39, 20. 40, 3. »• IffiS is omitted (sometimes in ordinary, frequently in poetical language): a) when followed by no com- plement, e. g. fliib Sib T^'iiJa in a land that is not theirs 15, 13; Ci^p"^ ai*T 'I'l)?';?^ Benjamin is a wolf that ravineth 49, 27; i3-npfl|;i "laan the man that taketh refuge in him (}^ 34, 9 ; tils'! tlittS? njbSFi may the bones which thou hast broken rejoice (j; 51, 10. Ill, § 87. — §88. CONPITIONAL SENTENCES. 141 P) When followed by the complement, e. g. : and k. declare unto them Jtid IDb';; Sf'i'in-ns the way wherein they o«ght to walk Ex. 18, 20. Y) When itBK would be equivalent to "he that", I. e. (J. 033 inai. ilSSir^ an abomination is he that cho.oseth you Isa. 41, 24. In that case the substantive elucidated stands m. not unfrequently in the constr. state, in particular: a) when it is a noun denoting time or place, e. g. Di^a Sifss in the day when I call i^ 56, 10; n»n 13''»'i iiiSW the years wherein we have experienced misfortune (}; 90, 15; nnsj ISD^nnn ia';"b3 all days of our inter- course with them 1 Sam. 25, 15 ; cf. also §21^.—^) always when ititi; would be equivalent to "of him who" &c., e. g. bs ST'N'b Dipia the place [of him who] knew not , God Job 18, 21 ; ii-l»:i-b3 all that belonged to him (the whole [of that which] belonged to him) G. 39, 4; ''Fiy'ii"4Cb nste the speechof one whom I knew not ({^81, 6. § 88. Conditional Sentences. dX denotes §88. pure condition and accordingly corresponds to the *' Lat, si, and the Gk.ei. — ^ib. stands when the condition is really, or at least probably, not fulfilled in the, present or will not be fulfilled in the future. — 13 as conditional particle signifies "granted that", cf. Gk. edv. An instructive passage for the difference between DK and ''2 is Exod. 21, 2 ff.— ibib, xbib if not. 142 III; § 88. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. a) The main clause (apodosis) is frequently in- troduced by 1 consec. (33, 10), more rarely by 1 copul. (n;a"'S'i then I will go to the right 13, 9, cf. Jer. 15, 19). — (3) To give special emphasis are employed: nij? "^S 31, 42. 43, 10 and T« "^S 2 Sam. 2, 7 (surely then, then indeed), rarely: 13 Isa. 7, 9. — '() The main clause often follows without an introductory particle: 20,7. 24,49. 43, 4, especially when it opens with a negation: 44, 2 3 and often. The main facts in regard to the tenses that are found in the conditional clauses (protases) may be learned from the following examples : OD'^riS Tl|; sb"DX "155 fiiS'ib 'ilSDh sb DDPiS )'■Q'^r^ if your youngest brother come not down with you, ye shall not . . . 43, 4; the perf. in the sense of the Latin future-perfect is rare: every one that remaineth in Jerusalem shall be called holy, "iShiH fn'i Dt5 if God shall have washed away Isa. 4, 4. II The perf. is regularly used to express a con- dition which is regarded as already fulfilled: Sd"DX "ihSln «5-!:x Tl'iiisa ^n "'nss^ if I have found favour, as I trust I have, then ... 18, 3, cf. 33, 10. 47, 29. nni2 I2n» 'isins-ns nlsUJa Sizii-DS if thou (now) sendest our brother with us, then ... 43, 4, cf. 20, 7. 24, 49.— n nXT ibiste;; IBDn lb if they were (had become) wise, they would understand this Deut. 32, 29; 'pi fsn lis nbb 'I3l*'a n]?b ab 'iSlni'anb if Jahwe had wished .... Ill, § 88. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 143 Judg. 13, 23; sijds DniaiiK t3?M ^b yaiJ ib? i? if my people were (now) obedient, I would humble their enemies ({; 81, 14. 15. — |j DnibsijIttX'i . . . Di'iffin lyrw^. ''?'] and if the princes will hear . . . , say unto them Jer. 38, 25; ty^l vh is^m I33ri-i3 Prov. 23, 13. ibib, xblb, if not, is almost always accompanied d. by the perfect (for it signifies: "if what really is were not"). Examples: Dfji-i np\? i3 ib n;in . . "la!* ''r(bS| ibib ''Jrinbti if the Grod of my father had not been with me, verily thou hadst sent me away with empty hands 31, 42; D'^'ayfe nj 15^1? nn?-i3 isnari'ariri »bib if we had not delayed, we had certainly ... 43, 10, cf. 1 Sam. 25, 34. Isa. 1, 9. <\) 27, 13. Conditional Sentences without Condi- e. tional Particle. When the conditional particle is omitted in English, the verb is placed, as in inter- rogative sentences, before the subject, so that we at once perceive we have not to do with a fact. In Hebrew it is otherwise. Here the following combina- tions in! particular, in accordance with their nature, readily adapt themselves to the signification of hypo- thetical sentences: a) two perfects with l consec. ; P) a double, jussive; y) an imptv. followed by another imptv. or by a jussive (cohortative). Examples, a) With me are young animals iinttl dlpS'11 (and they will overdrive them and they will die, i. e.) and if they 144 III, § 88. — § 89. OPTATIVE SENTENCES. overdrive them, they will die 33, 13; ■jiD« insflfsi DPi'l'lifTi, . , and if injury befall him (§75e), then will ye bring me down to the grave 42, 38; Di«;xn I'nnx qh"i. Dtnbx ni'a!*1 QWiisril. follow hard after the men, and when thou hast overtaken them, say unto them 44, 4, cf. 44, 22. — p) nb'^b ini'i tfttJn rnDri if thou makest dark- ness, then it is night ({; 104, 20 (cf. §47/"). — y) wy riKT lim do this and live, i. e. if ye do this, ye shall live 42, 18; iim 'n-n« w-i'i Am. 5, 6 ; ni^n;: ■'iiia^ ibic Prov. 4, 4; also without Waw: Dtib-yato ^'^i'^S-npS Prov. 20, 13 ; njPi?'! 'jR'ai "inii ^iHls ib» 139, 19. — iib with the impf. i^ijbIs ivyy^^ bicytttt': lb Gr. 17,18, also with the juss. ^y^l^ in"; lb 30,34. But with the perf. sisna sib that we had died! Num. 14, 2; f|b !B;?15 20, 3, cf. Jos. 7, 7. Optative sentences are not unfrequently expressed d. pfiriphrastically by an interrogation, e. g. iSttto'] lia BBi» who will appoint me judge? i. e. would that I were appointed judge 2 Sam. 15, 4, cf. 23, 15; isb'^ii "^ (}* 60, 11; las ib-'jri'i-iia who will giye me wings ? i. e. if I but had wings (f* 55, 7; bxnte". n?1«i_ 'ji'iS'n IPi. itt if 14, 7; any 'JF!']"''» that it were evening! Deut. 28, 67. — 'jri'' 153 has then become simply an optative particle, e. g. 'JTO'iinr! tj'iriln ]l5';"'a that ye would be altogether silent Job 13, 5; iJS&sn bisoa 1^_ "iM that thou wouldest hide me in Sh'ol Job 14, 13. The following expressions may be noted as op- e. H. Straok, Hebr. Graram.'' I. 10 )90, a. 146 HI, § 89.— § 90, OATHS. tative sentences without a verb: D?b OibiB peace be with you, Q"ins 5y!iia blessed be Abram 14, 19. Of. 1 Sam. 25, 6. §90. Oaths (assurances). Sentences containing an oath are generally expressly indicated as such by the verb ya»3 (but also simply 152X^1 14,22 &c.). The content of the oath, which follows in "direct speech", is in most cases introduced by the particles : DS "verily not", S'b-Di? and 13 "verily". Examples: is«a injaCD iriTOKl-bx 'J'lS^hVQ'* verily they shall not enter into my rest if 95, 11 ; 5fia-i3 . . . n-Tn lann-ns^ tfW ITDS 1?^ 13 t^p'ias, verily, because thou hast done this, therefore will I bless thee G. 22, 16. These particles are in most cases preceded by a formula of asseveration. Note esply. : a) 'n"""!! as sure as Jahwe liveth: nwi-DX 'n-in he shall not be put to death 1 [Sam. 19, 16; OPiS fl^itt'ija 13 'rr^n ye are children of death 1 Sam. 26, 16, cf. 2 Sam. 12, 5.— p) iSlk-in as sure as I live*: ysrii^-DS 'n li'i!* D»: ■'5!*"''I^ yaj'in rrittaias I live, saith the Almighty, I have no pleasure in the death of the wicked Ezek. 33, 11. — Y) ?it»B5 **^rf\_ 'TT^n as sure as Jahwe liveth and by thy life, e. g. 2 Kings 2, 2, where follows: '^aWS'DS I will not leave thee. — 8) PiT^a ISSp-dS nb'iB **">n as * iJX, so always in this formula. ** 1)1 in these formulae is not constr. state, but a bye-form of the adj. "in (living) formed by the contraction of aj to e. Ill, § 90. OATHS. 147 sure as Pharaoh liveth, ye shall not go out hence G. 42, 15.— e) 'n-bst i^^ '•ntiin 14,22, where v. 23 fol- lows with: n]3S-dii! I will not take.— Q ^iaiSI iS'^a 'n t\'l''_ the Lord watch between me and thee 31,49, followed by V. 50: ''nba-ns? ns?Pi-D6{ thou shalt not afflict my daughters. The following have the same signification, i. e. "• they serve to strengthen the oath or assurance: 7]) the formula of protestation ib nbiSn far be it from me= God forbid!, certainly not, e. g. 2 Sam. 20, 20 where follows : miniBX-DSfl. 3>>2X"DS I will not devastate and will not destroy; — and 0) the formula of cursing ns fl'ipi'i nbl. Q'in>iT navis iTiiay'i the cry concerning Sodom and Gomorrah, it is indeed great, and their sin ISp fTias ^S, it is indeed very grievous G. 18, 20; Dbiias i3 yea, I will destroy them (Hiph. of bl'a; union-vowel a see §79/") (j; 118, 10. 11. 12; 13 so especially in nny i3 and tij "^S V. §886p. 15, which in all the passages cited above signifies "it is the case that" and from this acquires an affirm- ative signification, is also used like the oxi recitati- vum to introduce the oratio directa, in which case it remains untranslated. Cf. 26, 9. 27,20. 29,33 &c. (In some of these passages it is possible that a remnant of the original meaning is still traceable.) NOTE. QSt as interrogative particle always expects an answer in the negative. Hence it has come to pass that DS has assumed -0. negative signification; and from this again follows the use of X'b dS in a positive sense. The use of dN; and nh dX in oaths is usually explained from the hypothetical dlS; by assuming an ellipsis. But to fill up the expressions of cursing cited in §c& in this way would produce nonsense in all the passages where God is men- tioned as swearing, (cf. besides 2 Sam. 19, 8. 2 Kings 3, 14) ; more- over this formula is found in a few passages where it cannot be taken as the apodosis to the dS-clause, which most scholars assume to have properly a hypothetical character (besides 1 Sam. 14, 44. 1 Kings 2, 23 cf. 1 Sam. 20, 13. 2 Sam. 3, 35).* Cf. P. Friedrich, Die hebr. Conditionalsatze pp. 98 — 101. in, § 91, TRANSITION 01' PART. AND INJ. CONSTRUCTIONS &C. 149 § 91. Transition of the participial and§^^' a. infinitive Constructions into the Oratio finita. When a part, or an infin. is followed hy other verbs, which, being logically coordinated, ought like- wise to stand in the part, or the inf., Hebrew writers are fond of changing the construction and continuing the sentence with the finite verb. In such cases we must, in English, after the part, supply the correspond- ing relative, after the inf. the corresponding con- junction. a) Where the partic. (or inf.) may be rendered 6. by "whoever, whenever" (8s av, eTrsiSdv) the perf. follows with 1 consec. (but if this 1 is separated from the verb, the impf.) ; p) where a concrete fact is spoken of, the impf. follows with l consec. (but if this Waw is separated from the verb, the perf.). Examples of the part. : a) Whoever remaineth in c. the city shall die, diltesn-b? bBjI. SSiini but whoever goeth out and falleth away to the Chaldeans shall live Jer. 21, 9 ; if Waw is separated from the verb, frequent- ative: Isa. 5, 23. Prov. 7, 8 (so also without Waw, impf.: Isa. 5, 8. Prov. 2, 14). || P) l-is ^^r] X*in NiSS-itt "h sa^l tU o5v 6 dvipeuaa? (xoi ■8-i^pav xai eiasveyxai; (xoi? 27, 33; -niss '^r\^^ ^tT\'s. siia ""ris nj3>n bssb to the God who heard me and (who) was with me 35, 3, cf. (Lis, 33; with Waw separated from the verb: Disbhn 150 HI, § 91. TRANSITION OP PAET. AND INP. CONSTRUCTIONS &C. ibsw Mib iBI n-^na^ rri'ib who go down to Egypt and have not asked of me Isa. 30, 2, cf. Prov. 2, 17. <;. Examples of the inf.: a) nDffil ^ISa ^'^T^iri\i< aiffl-1? till thy brother's anger turn away from thee and he forget 27/45 ; wait seven days ^b iPlS'Tin'] ?|''b« ''Sia-1? till I come to thee and'announce to thee 1 Sam. 10, 8; bv. nteSI inUIS^ p''1S aiwa if the righteous man turn away from his righteousness and do iniquity, he shall die Ezek. 18, 26; with Waw separated from the verb, the impf.: I have determined i'nn-b?'i ""^ixa nws 13«b isDiasn to break Asshur in pieces . . and to trample him under foot Isa. 14, 25. |[ p) «n;?si ibip ittiins iW and when I lifted up my voice and cried G. 39, 18; D''b»an iiris tfbm 'n niSB-nif Q?^|l?.3 in that ye forsook the commandments of Jahwe and thou wentest after the Baalim 1 Kings 18, 18, cf. ^ 50, 16. 92, 8. 105, 12f. ; but the perf., when Waw is separated from the verb: ibipa !)ytt« i«b'i . . . in'iiPl-ns oat?"^? because they have forsaken my teaching and have not hearkened unto my voice Jer. 9, 12. PARADIGMATA, LITTERATURA, CHRESTOMATHIA. Paradigmata. Ill IV YI Verbum firmum (§51 — 64). I. Perfectwm. f "^n^taiji. r)bt:j5/: Tbdi>2. nbt2|P/: ^^\>^.sg. \ ^Dbap -jn^tij: DFi^tifj iibap^ pi. I ^ribt:|5?s. Fibt?!?? Fii^i^ipis. nbtip? btap; s^. 1 iisbttfpD lP!bt:pD QnbtipD ' "n^^ps. nb^p Pibtflps. !i3b^p IFib^P tanb^p "^nbtaps. nbi^p nb^ps- iiibi^i? l^lb'isp DP^iaj? ''nbtipris. nbtipn nbtspns. nytapn b^t:pn s^-, sisbtopn iribt:pri Dp'btipri ^ib^apn i?/. "^nbtapMS. n!:t:pr; rjbtapns. tibtipn btapr; s^-. iisbtapri "jnbtipn onbtipM ^bt?pn i>/. rn^^pnris-s^f^pr^n J^^^pf^n*- f^btsprn btsprin s^. 1 ii^taprin in^^priri Drib^prin ^btDpnn p/. !lbtip3 pi. nbiap bt2p s^. . iibtap j3?, nbtsp btap s^. sibtsp p;. =o Si I bl III. Imperatiims. ^btppp/. [Hi^tspn] ^btsp^n nsbtap ^bt2p rebtipH ^b-'i:pri §62n V — ."ittsn II — ."nby I inf. "Tasn II — -^Tt^t ^"Kp. PIM? "Tb? I iptv. ;'ib?!« ,''l^?r! nayn ,^753?^ ''nan'^ nbs;: I ip/". "Tay;; II — .iby? ,n;ii:»P) ^rtttSFi ,n5ia»r) rnizT^pi. I'f'i^osj-i VI — .''Twr! ,'T''3?J^ ^''T''!??,^ V — .ntt:?n ; T IT ' T ; - t: IT : T IT ■* ' - T; it • : t it - t; it ' - r: it - t;it ' T 1 - r: (T ''i'ni'nSM V — .ha»2 II — .D111DM 01DX I Part. .nristt VI — Verba mediae gutturalis {§ 65). ; ntsniBs ttntis II — ."wnw p/. ;"n'[:m» an© I Perf. ' T -! 1 - - [ • -! IT ■* ' T -; rr ■- T ' ;n3'i3 "-Tia .ittHi p/. ;"n'!2TO '^on? III. — .luniBD i>;. .iD'ia pi. ;nD':a Sf'ia .lans ;?;. •■,rvan ore IV — .iDtis p^- ; n^renn onsnn VII — .innian pi. ; nnntpn nniBn VI — tsnisn II — .natsntj itsnw ."luniB "i:m» I itpv. ■■ T ' T : - : -: I- ' '-si- - : •* "Jl-ia .[nDtin?] ittffi Tiari? '*nri? Ill — .itsniBn "ipnisn .(cf. Ill) ifiann arenn VII — .npna la'ia ,''D'ia Paradigmata. 5 * — .njanopi ^onc'] pi. ;"''i?ri«r? 2. /. 'x:rv&^_ I ipf. "sfia"; .iittrop j^iansft I'ari?'; j9/. ;''ttn?in 2./. .''^nreilll .itiw i?/. pttriiFi 2. /. jdffi'i IV — .!i3'ia'; ^/. pptl^Pi 2- /■- pnncsj 2. /. ,nn«; VI — .iD'ih';^/. \^vyyc^ 2. /. ,?f']a'i .(cf. Ill) ^"lan-i nreni. VII — .inn©;' pi. ,?f!a)a ■Cttre'a jdnstt III — .Q''pnfe jttniij I Part. .(cf. Ill) tfiantt nnsri'a VII — .tf^h^ oreti IV. — d"'?'!?'? Verba tertiae gutturalis (§ 65). .i;inbffi3 2. /-. ,nbos II — .'"nribii 2. f. ,nbc I Per/. — .snb© 2. /. ,nlfeo IV — .wM 2. /-. ,r!|i» "n\t! Ill — 2. /: ,nb«n VI — .rinbtsn Pinbisjn ,nnibT»!n ''nibtin V .rin^ni»n 2. /. ,n>iri«n VII — .nnbtin — -Cl^i?) n>« III — .'"nbiBri II — .^rtb© I inf. .nbDicn VII — ,^r!i!:i»n V — .'"nbffin II — .njribB inbti ,iribT!j '"nbo I Iptv. pnibtpn '"nbiBri, V — .[ninb©] inbw ,iri^ia 'I'ni© III .n>!ni»n VII — .nsnbTsri inibttjn ;nbiB'; '^nbiBi. II — .ninbtin 2. /: ;>/. ^■'nbtii I ipf. — '•'.nsriViBFi /. i?/. ^rbit", nbw'; III — .nsnbisri 2. /. p/. ,n5ribiBin inib©^. pi. ;inibi»!n 2. /., (;"«ss. '^nbiB::) Vbi?? V .(cf. Ill) nbPiiBi. VII — .nibffi? i III .Diffibtc ,mbi» .'^nnbiB /". ;d'iribii /nbij Pffr^. .n>P!«tt VII — .rfiita V — .nbctt .rtb«5 II — .^rfb© I /«/: ais. 6 * Paradigmata. Verba S"s (§ 66). ,n:!5^DSp!ibDS'^ pi. fbDS ,''b3i{h bDSh ,bytxp, "bDS'i I /;?/■. .{Warn cons. cf. §a) | .bDSb ,n5V?Sri ibssn Verba S"B § 67. .ntjan ,mc''*in "«ian V — .pim: ,n«a3 "©as II Perf. .n«an ,m»an *«an VI — ."Bjian V — .'ntoa .bb? I /«/. pffiiain "©an V — .[njoa] wa ii»a ©a .bs? I ip^y. .nsffian loian ©3': .nsbsri *ibBi. ;!5S!!{ ,ibBn bsn ,bBn "bin'i I ipf. pffi-'ari 2. /". ,«ia:' V — .njoan loai. j??. ;ii»aft 2. /. ,iijan .njisapi wa^ v^- Pi»an 2. /: ,^'©5;' VI — .npiB^n iiiiia:: ;>/. .tiaa VI. — ."©■'a'a V — ."caD II P«r;. TV, • - T • Verba V'-iB (i"s I.) § 68. — .QnaiBt 2. yi. ;piniai: ,!i2iBi; "btJi: II Perf. ""aiBin VI. — .Di^aiDin 2 pi. ;n:aTain ,n3iiBin "''aiisjin V .onaiain 2. ;??. ;nsTBin ,naTBi!n .'^''aiffiin V — .'"'aisjn II — .^naic .^p©-; I /n/. ''"nttin II — .nsaio lao pno ^n« .*sii i //^ft^. .TO2»in laiiBin paitpin °''a«in V — .^ivt) ;i3Tain laiBP aiBn ,aT»n ''no:; -(li®?) 'isi?''? P^- \^W^. I //?/■. — .''"affl^'; II — .ai»: ,n5:3TBr\ laten jnj^ffin la©:!/)/. ;3i»« ,nw VI — .naiBiPi tt'^isi'' i?/. ;''a''iaipi 2. /. '•^aiiaii v .nDaiain law i?/. paiain 2. /". .nteitt VI — .2i©iM V — .aiBij il Par^. Paradigmata, 7 * Verba t'^s (V's II.) § 6,9. .DMisin 2 pi. ; ration .na'i'ain *sit:in V Perf. — .nsittiri (lai:;!) iai3'';ii>^ pat?''?) 2. /: ,''a:3i'i I Jpf. .i^itiin 2. /: ,*aitii:: v ■yn2il2 V Par?. I' ttS"; I 7n/. Verba V's § 71. Drittj? jitt]^ ;?/. pPiKij? jFittj? nttj5 jSraj? 'nj; I Perf. ;''nittip5 ,rii53ip? 'ntops ,nttip; '^■"Dipj II — .^isttp j^ritip ,ntittip 'ntoip III — .tisia'ips ,)tf02i'^i "o^iiaip? .i^ipj P^- — .Mttip j^niattip ^Dttip IV — •oriia'aip 2. p/. irsttttip .ittipn i??. ; iniaipn jniMipn I'lniiQipn ,nMipn ^' "nipn V ;p)iapin .frap^in ^Dpin VI — .isia-'pn ,'iini'a''pn Dniiaipn .(of. Ill) Qttipnn VII — .DPitipin 2. p?. .'Dipn V — .Dttip III — .*Di>n II — .''nip I inf. pttipn ''dipn II — .njHp itiip ;'''pip ''Dip I iptv. — .njttti'P I'a^'if? P'?'2'ip Dttip. HI — .[nsBpn] wpn .(cf. Ill) D^Qipnn VII — .[nsMpn] Ta'^pn p'a''pn Qpn V ,iaipn mpn lOipn Cnp^i; iwss^. "'djj';) Dip;! I W- ,*Dipi II — -Dip; .njittipin laipFi .ns'^tiipn iiaip;! ;DipK 2. /. ,''Dttip'; III — .[njittpii] ittip'; i?/. ,Dip^ ,''»'ipn 2. /. ;«iti'aippi 2. /. ,''DiQip']IV — .njti'nipp iMtiip'^^i'^. ;°''M'Kiipri 2. /, ,C"Dp^i ;juss. "'Dp;') "D-ip; V — .nsttttipn latiip'; i>/. 2. /. ,1'Dpi'' VI — .nsttpn u. 'ns'i'spipri wp;i p/. ptt''pn .(cf. Ill) Dttipn': VII — .njttpin lapi;' ;''ttpin .Dpn V — ."Dipn II — .''Dip I Inf abs. 8* Paradigmata. .Bitiipa .""DipJ II' — .'afiippass. ;na)3 /". /up^ I Part. — •dittip.'a ."Diptt V — .[Dttip)?] IV — .Dttip'a III — .Dttipn'a VII — .Dpitt VI Verba »"» § 73. ; "itiiao ,niaD-''niaD ,(intr. n>p bp) nana ''bio'I Perf, ,n3o5 sao; II — .^oiao .iniao oiniao ,(m/r. !i>p) ioao p/. — .isiaiDD jliniaDS DMaD5 ,iaD5 7?/. ;''riiaD5 ,iniaD5 'niao: •■"aDn v' — ' .b|n .aaio'lV — .b^n ,(cf. ft-.) aaio III (labn) *^a&n i??. priiapn .niacin 'niapn .naon .aon ; ['niapin] ,napin '^apin VI — .*i5iapn iiniapn Qiniapn .b^nrin ,aainpn Vll — .[oniapw] ,iapin pi. ,apn V — .V?n .aaio III — .asn II — /ab I /«/". lasn -oaen ass-i II — .['npao] lab ;''ab ab I /i?n, laaip aaio III — .[njiapn] .[njiapn] lapn papn ,n;iapp\ lab'^p?. ;''abn 2. /. ,(cons. ap^i) ab'; I ipf. — .{inir. 'ibp'i ;''bp:;) .("las': ;abi.) abj ,^5150^ ^abn ,aaio'i^ III — .asi 1 .[npasi?] lasi. ;''a&r\ 2 /". ,aBi. II pL p3pr\ 2. /. ,ap^ V — .is^n"; ,aaio;i IV — .V?tt., ^^ov pi ;aDi'' VI — .aos ,ns"iaDP\ labn .njiaon laoi .['njiapin] — .aaiDia III — .ap; II — .aiap pass. ;aab Part. .miapitt /". pi. ,ap*iti VI — .aoB V — .aaiott IV. .aisn II — .aiao I inf. ahs. Paradigmata. 9* Verba n"b § 74. pn^ba ,(§5&2 n) rr-ba '"rr^ba /nnba ''nba I Per/-. ^in''bM ,nrtM nbw II — .is'^ba ,^riiba dtiiba .""iba pi. n^a III — .'^ii''bai jiinibas Dn^bw. ,iba5 p/. ptiibas .tribas ;''ti''ba ,nrta nba IV — .an^ba ,iba pi. ;'^ri''^a ,ninba ;'fri^ban ,nnban f^nban) ^nban V — .dn^a a p/. ,iban p/. ;^!niban ,nnb:jn nban VI — .aniban ,*iban pi. ,*ibann i>/. \'^t)%tyr\ ,nri>ainn ^nbann VII — .Dn^ban .Qnibann ^"^ban "nban II — .^^ns^ba '"'iba r^ba "nba I iptv. ;^^sr! ii^an V — .^^ns^^a' *iba pba "nba III — .^iban .(cf. Ill) nbann VII — .''^^nj^b^n ^iban /Tfns^bari '"^ba-;;?/. ; nbas j^^bari nban .nbaw ''"nba^ I ipf. . ^WVaPi ^bai^^ban's! /. ,''^nbaVll — .nba? npbari ibai? /"nla^^ IV — ."^ns^^ai^ ^ba^, i?^- r^ban 2. /. /'nbaViil — ;'"^bari 2. /. .^^nbaVv'— .^"'nD^bai^ ^ba^, pi. ;™'^ban 2. /: .nrb'^n ^baj ;?/. pb^n 2. /. nba^^ VI — .^^ns-'bap iba": pi. .(ipf. apoc. %0-t) \\ .(cf. Ill) n^ani. VII — III — .^''nbas II — ."iiba i>«ss. ;diba-»^nba I Part. .nbania VII — .nbw VI — .nbaa V — .nbaalV — .nbaa niban V — .niba III — .«=niban II — -'niba I inf. .nibanin VII — 10* Pavadigmata. Verba s"!: § 75. ; insstt, (§ 5 ft 2 n) nsar» "nsjJM jHssm "ssb I Per/. TT'^" :• TT TTt't:iT TT ' {intr. "iisbti jnsbtt sbtt) .•wt.To iifiNsa DJisap ,issio j9/. ,iNS'ffli_p/. pnssffi ,ns5S535 ^^nss^? .nssffi "sstiD il — .nnssttt jisc^tti?/. ;^^nss'a ,n«sftt x^'n III — .nnxsaa ,nKisrn vf^xan V — .[''^r^^?l!r'a] ,nsatt stsfa IV — VII — .xstin VI — .Drii«Stt'^^ pi. ;''sa'a"; IV — -nssiittn li^aiQi _p/. ;x!itt'i III — finiy^^ VI — .nsi^san ixisa^ pi. ■,ri.-^Ta->_ V — .njxaapi .(cf. Ill) i^sjiani. VII — .nsssttn ^iksi?'; p/. ;(§ 255-, intr. Disbti, sbtt) msb /., D-^SiaiD, *«S;b I Par^. IV — .ssttti III — .nxsM? /. ,xs'a3 II — .siaiiQ pass. .xsttin'a VII — .KiittTo VI — .Vi'^ra'a V — .^iran Litteratura.* M. Steinschneider, Bibliographisches Handbuch iiber die theoretische und praktisohe Literatur fiir hebraische Sprachkunde. Leipzig 1859, XXXVI, 160 p. [Addenda permulta et Corrigenda enu- meravit J. G-ildemeister, Zeitschrift -der Deutsohen Morgenlandi- sohen Gesellschaffc XIV, p. 297 sqq.] Wilh. Gesenius, Geschichte der hebraischen Sprache und Schriffc. Eine pliilologisch-historische Einleitung in die Sprachlehren und ■Wbrterbijeher der hebraischen Sprache. Leipzig 1815. VIII, 231 p. F. E. Loescher, De causis linguae Ebraeae. Francofurti et Lipsiae 1706. 496 p. 4. S. D. Imzzatto, Prolegomeni ad una Grammatica ragionata della lingua Ebraica. Padua 1836. 234 p. Franz Delitzsch, Jesurun sive Prolegomenon in Concordantias V'' T' a Julio Tuerstio editas libri tres. Grimma 1838. XVI, 260 p. W. Rob. Smith, Hebrew Language and Literature (Encyclopaedia BritannicaO XI [1880], 594b— 602b). B. Pick, The Study of the Hebrew Language among Jews and Christians, in: Bibliotheca Sacra 1884, p. 450 — 477. 1885, p. 470—495. II. *Wilh. Gesenius, Thesaurus philologicus criticus linguae Hebraeae et Chaldaeae V* T'. Editio altera secundum radices" digesta j)riore germanioa longe auctior et emendatior. Lipsiae. Vol. I : 1835; vol.11: 1840; vol. Ill, 1 (s-hac): 1842; vol. Ill, 2: 1853 (composuit Aemil. Roediger); III, 3: 1858 (indices, additamenta et emendationes digessit et edidit Aem. Boed.). 1522-(-116 p. 4. ? Libros a Judaeis medii aevi conscriptos enumeravi in : Lehrbuch der nRu- hebraischen Sprache und LUteratur von H, L. Strack und C. Siegfried, Karls- ruhe und Leipzig 1884, p. 107—116. 12* Litteratura II. ni. Willi. Qesenius, Hebraisches iind chaldaisches Handworterbuoh. Neunte Auflage neu bearbeitet von F. Miihlau und "W. Volck. Leipzig 1883. XL VI, 978 p. [De hoc libro cf. C. Siegfried in: Theologisehe Literatui-zeitung 1883, Nr. 23; P. de Lagarde in: Gbttingische Gelehrte Anzeigen 1884, Stiick 7, p. 257—288, = Mittheilungen, Gottinoren 1884, p. 208 — 239; Friedr. Delitzsch, Hebrew Language, praefat.; H. Strack in: Theol. Literaturblatt 1884, Nr. 22, col. 169. 170]. — — , Tranalationem Anglicam auctam et emendatani edituri sunt Charles A. Briggs et Francis Brown. Jul. Fiirst, Hebraisches und chaldaisches Handworterbuch iiber das Alte Testament. Dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage be- arbeitet von Victor Eyssel. Leipzig 1876, 2 veil. XLVIII, 806 + 667 p. Paul. Martin. Alberti, Porta linguae sanctae. Budissae 1 704. 1259 p. 4. [B. Davidion], The Analytical Hebrew and Chaldee Lexicon: con- sisting of an alphabetical, arrangement of every word and inflection contained in the 0. T. Scriptures, precisely as they occur in the sacred text, with a grammatical . analysis of each word and lexico- graphical illustration of the meanings. London 1848. 90 [gram- matica, paradigmata], 84 p. 4. Samuel Lee, A Lexicon Hebrew Chaldee and English: compiled from the most approved sources. Oriental and European, Jewish and Christian. London 1840. XVI, 664 p. *W. Gesenius, Hebrew and Chaldee Lexicon to the 0. T. Scriptures, translated with additions and corrections from the Author's The- saurus and other works. By S. P. Tregelles. London 1859. XII, 884, 35 p. 4. B. A. Davies, Hebrew and Chaldee Lexicon to the Old Testament with an English-Hebrew Index. 3d ed. revised by E. C. Mitchell. London 1880. 778 p. Friedrich Delitzsch, The Hebrew Language viewed in the Light of Assyrian Eesearch. London 1883. XII, 73 p. W, Wright, The Book of Jonah in four Oriental Versions, namely Chaldee, Syriac, .3 bn^ nins ':s<2n5<.i ^'dj5$ n'ri ^3 ,st5anFi na:;^ 'ra: i§8al. 2 §6a 3 §7e * §5a.6. 5 ged.c. Chrestomathia I. 23* -^t-ht^ b^2^ ib^a ^Dirj 1a^ ^ns "Dib.^rt' 'lo. ^rt ^ibM i Dinri ^ds? .rilp^nb i:nbsa b^smb ■n-bipu ^T'y^n bii^n n^i | rilbbqa'nbirjnn n3|b' ificjNi li^a iss^a D? "ja ns?' '.?- u. ' ' .5^?! inJ5MT II^J??!' '■^U'Bt'^ b^J^ I29I!5^ ihj^b 5?^?T HD^i nb^^ ^ij?^ T]s^ b3a im t^^m I'm n^n^n i^^^n I ^nma ^nsa ^Dsa .n;5?i ^:^;^n 235 in^i25 naj? D)?:;' npb ir^ a— \\ nbizS^ vq^: •inbizj" n3j2« ' .^?in35 laHD ia^5< insi< ^m b^J^f' i ev"'h2. inb" nrib DDb j nnb^^bi^V -"Ti^^l '^^'^^^ "153 "12^^ •1?i^1'l DSniPi^ Di-jlb?^ D^il^a Dri's? .d^nnn d^n^r jnn | '\)-\^_ bra ^ddizj ^Sns .ds? '•'^n^^n^. 'n'b' 1^^' iii^ PDD|5< ^ti2 131^$ nam Tann .o-'^is/" ."itin nbDii nljins ipsn ^ban m^n labDm •t t:t :t i~:ti-:t -st ::t; n^5: n^SM rpn ?i; n^m?} ""hd '14. .nh^sn n^-i Tip p^ir5i i^nari 3t: niirj n;bji 13^^; '15. 1 §5c. 2 §8a2. 3 §46. 4 §4c. 5 §4(i. 6 §4e./'. 24* Chrestomathia I. =!Z2^to dj5^'=t:2 d^P^:? uy^^. -"^^^V- ^'???n ^DDto irjsbb s<& ^^^p «5to (n©;) n^; 'le. ."dtp n^nDtij iit:i£5an^ iii5 nrjM ni:? n^ri nn^yt n^rj nto^ hditj 'i?. Mapn nbpx naDH ^mbrf^nsb? nmnji nsnn n^V hT}_ f]Tzh ' .n|i2a '^--Tin- nr^n nbDs nan i "nbbirj'nb-i ns nis *nHs I nsiij ns'^ •■ • : T : ~ I T T TT n2T nn^i^ mb nss nbii nito | rap niii']\a-:n bbn ,ab''^7-?pn ^n?i33 ,d^?n3ri' "bati .ns'ia ■^'rica '/n •'K^n? .^"na? .inx d2> ',d''53tn TV - ' • - T - ,:a^'^n fi5T2j .'nsir inKi3-]2 .dM':i ,ci;n m'h i. §33. .d-'sn fiisii: i^n-jto ".^n'^iip .irSTi?" d"^?T^ fivit .I'l^S^ .*d':':^p ^i?in' -MIS? .'d^pip-Tn nia/.n^/' ."iniDTi: .drT'tiay'in ti-'inhyiFi .d-^ian nhyin .nin^iri ..." 1 -; I I ■ - -: I ' • - -: I ' •• I .di'^n m^iaaa^ .y^xr; nis^aa ,ini3b5fa 11. T : : - ' ' : : - ' t -: i- ' I t t v v -: i- .dti'^nnBTaab .dfihsira ,in1nBpa .dg'^rinTrria /d':":?^ ini:in;i .f^i'^i^l -^3??'^)?? /!^ f^^i?? .f^iai?? § 34. ,ni3'nV '^ip-w'^s .tjinJil? 'P^^^'?' i^T'1^1. -^"O^^i"^ .Tihiii ^nrax I .drti? /bn\^x' nbsp ' .ds^tiii^a 1 § 39j. 32* Chrestomathia II A. § 35—38. niabiB^ in^jbm ,^p, wjbia .niaby /jj^aic n|b5^ .Tj^tib^jip n'b^iip '^JnbaiB '.rrex nbate •oi'^innST? .^''tynyg ,xiii n)j5a"'.D5nn5fiB ^nna'a ,Dbiy rii^i:^ inib53> ,"i|7a"hb5y I ni^Ht: nin^^x '(^ 12, 7 'ax) 'h .C3t-i^iTb4\''t3''n2Jbs nibiy ,inib''yn V •• I :t ' ■ : ■ : :t ' t-; it § 36. .irnbi?^ y"is ,'^riibi72 .Dn^rii-iapS] ^pi^s^^^? i. Iroat?' .Tiban m^itpi .ninsinV.in'^'iiN!' ,'i3>iri t^'^'ii^ .Qri'bab'b •"ri'jliia .Qtnsifiti Dn^nsati § 37. 1 .tiiwba .rTiiirr: wba -^ws^'j ."b^sij m^a^^a .ni- nri'ri n'nnn b^nnn •sn'^'i^^b n'^-^isan D'^^iaa '''^laa .nis^j-'SBri n''!a''pEfj b'^a'^iBiri' "jp^ssn § 38. Qninx ^pf^vi. ^5na ^iD^na ^3T'i^i< 'I'T'?"!^ i- i\i^ tjtp'^V ^s^ns! iirns" tj'^aN ca'o^wa Drta ija sii^nx riiriaK'i drsa ri^'riN; in'-a ^wjn " sirrhN -: •• -: -• ' I • T : •* : t • t J v - t : im'i) d^'tux'^rL na':a'iSu ^j'^bs rsa n'^'^yp 11.. Eep. i-iinato tjFi'istea inapi ^f?!7S^ cii^2?'ip i. Chrestomathia II A. § 39. § 44—46, 33** : • ' T T » — : r ' r ; ■ t ;t i : it ; • v •■ i : • t'n dWp "i'l'q ds-i'i'j 'sb'i dp'^iniiTrra "^nimpna .dr;;"' rnEiiJ ,d'^5T» tcti: .tbtd rita .d^in niBtz; §39. ,d''r''. n^tey ,d"'5^ ^iss .n^itey d^^is ,d''T2JDN niioy ' • T V V -: ' • T V ■■■ ' IT T -: • T ' • r -• t t -: nT255> n^biii ,d^i23d3 iffly nyaiN II .d^^i'nn Triw xr t; ' 'T; xt tt;- 't;- •.•:•—, fl^j'2^ tT^to d'^nm ibs'iTp;' ■'tjaTr ito d-'Dip ,d'":B ^to nusari II .rrnto ynin' d'^^y .-d-^'^y mloy -db-^ ^toy d^an; /di-^ ntoy nyaix ,&bx ntoy nsia^ ,bpTs T T •• : ' T T T T : - '"^Iv V T T T ; ' 'v V rinipy ^113 ,n:ai< nitey n;bp i^j^a hby ■'dtb .ta^x .riDTiJ ir^ipy yicri ,1133.; 'tt "T: ■t;-'tT ••: 'T "T nis5j yian .di-rixa ■ d'-w .njir d:'m5j',iijVn^'P .d^^pys f|^s ,Ta">5 J^bN II .d-^by^ip riiK^p Tabii" .njir nsa'',TiJ''N d^sbx niisy /d^^s^iB d^sbit' nynii t •• ' ■ • t -: v V -; ' •tit . T-: - : • Tiiiij ,nDTf rrnipy d'-rns ,d''baa rriTBy ,d''i:; waia Tjbab' niTj rrnipy ya-ij^a '.iij'inb '^ay nya-isa drt'w'bb r'inyb ^iapaa ^aibna"':j^ri''b!!^'^^T',? '°^? ,63^^^! ?T1^ Q-'bisja'^';' 'Kriaaii o^'pSTB'b^ Qri^^njsnsVjl .d-":^ msaa rniar^ I ^si^pii '^a'laM Bi'?V3s:;ii ^jji-iss:^ tDi-i'sJiisibii :j;na^' ''btb 'id II .ofsin n^ipr^i ,Y'ixn"7Ta':'bii ,d^2b Jdri'bH-bi-b? biia tjb^ji 'h h'i-i^ bK^wwb lixi diniDTp^ "^r;??? T??^^ ^5^iia^3 ^nbujaasi ii. ds^a'^ni) dn^a'^ffl di^tinpa^ QO'^?^' "if^?*??- cim''Dtbi ,nari 'niniri;?ii 'i .di^tppbi inriBTpaaii '^riri'irsi Tj?ab'] ' ' .^na'bifl '"a-'a fbi'ta^ ■'a^a § 54. ii^atp dri'^aiB "n'^ao irnatt .Jiiba riiba 'qba n'ist Fi'isj iii'iST rnii rrpi .dn-iia "^iipa ."Fi^aiB •"vii-n T\ib ii'i5D' '.riniTfl'iSTfl ' '.rrQ T'^3 ^3inn3 ' § 5d. 46a3. 2 § 6/S. Chrestomathia II B. § 54—59. 35* ••npris ns^TB sisssaiD "nysziB DFiyaic nabn si5:abri •':-T t:-t :*tt • : - t ■■■:-: t:wt :-t ^Rn^I? nspi: nn'ip^ ,n^I5 .si^ss h^as^ni'"' ^riVr iibb^" '^bs^ ^^'r ii ^mriN ,mnN'',i3nx\anW"et ^hjsa ujsi^b ^bjb "^iarab ciBTpb ^liip ttsir ' ' " § |5. ^^3p ihjp ' naibb ^nsp' siisp ^so ii aiiab i '^sps "Tp'iib Tcnb ■^npTi aiir si^bt ii^pj "ibj ' ^si"] 5:in'i .nya'ffl na'iTfl ntosip 'naips' i *ibin' n^tDfflN ii^bffifi iiipvi": ^'S3"'!pp ^n'lrn ■n'siaK " §57. iisap': iiSBffin ■'SBpn ysripri toBo^ bbip^ •H'^bTBi^ nasir? iiisffi^ ^ajj^.^ aiip^ b^5^ b'i[:3>i! 1 .ttbri iirik'Tc: bii;i?;n nsn'^ipri '^a'^p^ '•^^ffe ^'^l?? ^^P? ^t^V'^': .■jwfiirri'^Wfipn -jiiaiTfl^ 'fiiapiB'' rnsnpiin a^TziN D'"i;j3 'lap i^'aV'^C? ^'^^0 t^'V?'"? ^^^''^' f?''^" ' §58' .n'l^Tip i^aiB Ws^h nabh^D^abhW t]bh D^'i^ap ^^ap /n Ti^n:?! .'m^ar; ^t^a'^' '.ab "^i^hw arik nstb !y;n aitobi aitj y'ib i2'"?2:J*!i "in '."qjiya nbiiJi Rep. iiiiT $ ^'f?aT£na \p12y ' ^^1? 'ti '^jWj? ^'b'la-na nb'ia'%7bx 'n {"ifir ■j^x'] ^bws n^is'p;' ns':^ roana D::tt^ri ihi^;:^ 'n-fin Ji^ay'^ncab'Tim lin'is^a J Q^>i:-"?ab ^ -jw ' pjsni ^ 'nb d:^!^ iis'lia? "n^STS? Dn'frffi? 'ri")aTE? ^nns? ifips? ^ §59. I ii'ittisn ^laush ^isaph .'"tjban tiban 1 abanb 1' iirnc: 36* Chrestomathia It B. § 59—63. iiS'iiB': Timv) ^aiBp riDnpBri ins? inex ^nns'; tib-; § 60. ;i3-i:a'^ Fi'is'^ ra'^ ^'is'^ QFitcjsa "n^pisa ffl]3n I ^'iBpa n'ffipa D|3 i|''^ ^a-i 'i diri^fiTii rrn^':] n-ia^ nn'j?'isin''iaT' ni'ixsb ^i^if!] ''■:|'!i ^na'i '^a'!! -int!^ /- ' ■^mpna iiTBipnn T2;]5n3 nj'js^ri i^^jisin ]r\:2.'T\ ,D3Tfl'ipr 'tt'^i?'; '■t]''^a':i5p jininiana ti^isna ^isia ^n'^^ 'Tinia ^3)5 li '^sipti rsBii»9 .tDm> '^ibt'^'m^'^'mph npb JitipbnViri^Tij na''ia ^a'l'' § 61. .canb'inri rib'^iiri ^b^'^nn nb'^'^an b'^'^nn n^pari b^^nnb I onnipn '^nrfiBri n'^nipn DnaiTot/ Q'STrri ^s-^bTp!' ''5''bT2Jn VbipiS! | 'iii-'bipn ^i-'bipn t|biijri b'^pipbb ci^b^'iiaa y'nia ^bip: nnipn-bx' n'^nds ri5''bir? nsbiph II n-i^ja Tstri ,n':bpn '^n'^'^pa D'^rrnaa .npb^a Q"3bipa ^bma aapa '^'Dbip^ sisb^Jn § 62. t]bnririb ^^p'i'nh? P^lbriCi iji'Tfbijnn tjbriinn njibririii ifp^: nsbnris d'^jbnna nibnwp 'tjbnria =i'ibo ',pB5)5 ^135:^1 Eii^nTi "isasi | 'nnbyji ''Fiisti ' §64. nnisni I "-[bm bxipx:! >ib^5^i i^jas'inV b'Ti^ 'nsp^i ■qbiBW D3T2i?i!" b^n?i"f t3|5^';l ir^i'::! ' ii^S'i'-ji I ^liB*;:! ^■^C," ■'^P-i?^ ^'!15'!5 'T:T- ^-5^' ^"^.^ ^^^-5 I- §^^- ririTzja '.pnrf Tti'ib '"^cihci "^.ttTS': ^apK"; nit)^ .n^biani .yaip? nhnb .n'-b^a -nbTca ?-ctb ii. nriBs^ S'lTsi frnarii 't|b-n^a' tcw ii ^'yniBK .r!'')p:2r! barin I ?5iBt5 'i^^j'^' nna^^ 5>|3n';i i ''tiJjTi;^ bisia si-)h?ri i^ssri^i 'ns!:;,:'i' tjn?*!) ^njjbnsV Tcninsi '.iibann "lajni ]raiT\ i^nisn iiajyn "^niyn iwsji njib^m •^nicin!] ^^ir^i i^^'p ' l^^O^f? ^^b^n I 5hriD !i'i'n?,^:i •^pTti'::'' 'pii'^noi '^"ii^ivi ''•^.™"'?^,*!!! ^^P*??!!' '3Pi'5?C'i mhxiBri B^psa .u^yitj^ ^patT^ ^'^^^?. iH- ^aniisi! .iisni rri?;? ' .ih^b tjkqa at?b D''a>«3 iiDnan Jisna^'V^nbrQi'^sibnns ''.(«)?/■•) nbi^TrS'i ^isms"! ^" r • -! IT • : T -; : • -: : ■ ' t-: : • ; -: : •- 1 § 63/. 2 § 95d. ^ § 6,4i. 38* CHrestomathia II B. § 65—66. ^Pl^i^^ ' -CiPiyiTii ,i?!bnFi5 fisybani hsni^spii nrrad - - T -:iT -;i- -:iT x'; - : -; i- ini? '.'in)::!!!!! ©25'^''^:? y'li'^ 11 j D-'iSaij-n? Q^stiisr! bsj!; p^'^i^ j?;i!|i bT'^n "ri'^'isi m-in/ ninb'!! I'i^' D^3?ia-]p 'n pin^ '•'^odfi Q''??1 IP?^ I'^s? saiab j'nn 'nm^ ^t2j>j ^nan'':]m jybis^' D'^p'^'^? jnbsm H Jb^siaa rnaiD t^iairri yis-b'^nj: xb ci^in':i nhn t|tira-'bissi ^ab-bia 'ti-bx^ntii' psnW ns^jiij 'n ^as "ifflji;''d''X3?ri-nx iiTaian >^b ir'."j^iBFi-bs n^x Dti'^nijiii nr^^5n-D'^ ' '^P5 d'i iiSBii^V dn^as? nxi rnqi^-bi-m ''n '^'c'ii 11 r-jssi ' "^a^^b ' ^naj I' : - ■ T : IT T § 66. rrnrxi '^iziK': ^'-\m7\ "imri nt^^m) Tpm'] ^m "imb h^'-poht. ns-iakn^ '■\mr\': v^'a^'^'i nak'b^ {^I'laxp ^bsxn bii^n Ti'bSN Fibssi | -ijjk;: -lais,:; ■ ■^'lax iax sibix'nibiKni biVn1"bs^^n1 &n nbii^V'nbii^'i :'"•■= A- ~ ~ A" T^" : T : I : » IplV. § 626. 2 §84f. 3 § 836. Chrestomathia II B. § 66—68. 39* nab' j'ra^n n^Tj-n mj^ri ii .■jtitnK';' wrji* bbn;: bbxb ri^ari i^an besnii^si bB?5'"nb35 ^ibss^i hm ' ' §67. .h-i^nn '"i^aa ,Th2 sn^an ■^t^'^' "^'^'a?!]' '^a!'^ ti'^^ix^^ p^5':i ' to'^an sia^'isn b:2sm bs?!! b-'ti'n Tanb in'ia?^ ci|3:;' la^i ,?|05 tjB?i ,^135^^1 ,''b mrari ,«rnTan cifV^ -i^'pTDSb ybpa ,qa5b ^I'A na^? d-'as? as? xpTE? xrn^a ,nni< io3?5 ,;]ipap5 snryi ujani' .anr^ .?^M 'iisaj^ sbpb ?5bri yE:':i"ris^i ib-piB^5 impa-iy pi^pb"! ripb II nytpyiL ,32, 12 n?c? ,^3^5 wdsV ^yos nrip^ii nijpb'] nrip sinpn ^ni?''^?ip i^jsr' ^^E^ "i^b iisjnj tiiw I innpa Tiprip ^np^i np fpb npni n|3D njmi nim'i (!2jn;rip "jn? 'in? soFin -|ni* ''^Fir),;i, "pa' li '."Fin ' insi i^i-'^Dn ib-ins^ y-^T-jfiS ^in? ninb t^nb ''pa n;n Jtjab "ik^ ''inisa!! nsranrbN ■'rilin bs Tin's d-'-isp^f 'b':7^tiri '.n.^sa ^ain npi^^ t^b IID^tl inp^n 3>15': , TB'njFr-jS ^if^ ^-h^^ "ibj^D '' §68. dp'l^'i"1 ''i'l'i!^^ "'tJ'P^ ^^^I'l^i ni.bin I *ii£rn':i n^s^pi ,n-ibb i]bni ,nb"a 'cio'^i .r^'^iM'sVi ,(!2) v^jti) s^^^iH a^T^'ia atpin ^ispi^'i qph n"i":iin ,i^sph ss^b jj-iis Tii-nin i^rr^pi^i nii'*'! nnih npirri n-'ph ^na^ia afi'^i tian^;: :B':)"n jiiJ'K ■jtd"^^' hj^^Tc^" | ^i^ib' ■'nbxin .a^aSi^ I iija':i "nsa; n:|5"'x ^a?^ tjy'^': siBr ^n^n-ib ^tdt ,n"i5 ' I'^i 't^nnba ' t^ii^2 ;i"!bn5 !inb.*;5 ^ 'ibn ibit 40* Chrestomathia II B. § 68—69. § 71. ^2Tr;i i^ni D'^iT'i ti'm-Tn ,^n'r:}^ "715 ^sii; T17 .rpbri' ?]'br;' ,^b-?ib \'T\'J?b Tj^nna nsbsi hssbn^ ,bDiini -j^bsV bi^in 'i nis-'bi^j tj'^bi?:: ■'nsbiri ',^5bi>rip r"pin 'n ' n^s'i^ -t^bxiri^ 'bs-is xb ','ia'!! b^iu Rb • T §69. n-'p'ri ,t;|i?'' I'^b'^x ,Du''::S'i ^inp'^si i^b-nt?'^;: nil: .ifi'^nii^ t^^Ti ^tts^i sniia'' nan'' ttis"' .nsa^xi r ■■ T- § 71. u-g'h) D2i-ia ^naain ^'^aip'; D?^ipin D^jipx nnsi^ij ii^iiD ^^iip !i53!ip wab Mib "l^ljb 'siiw Dnp? n5j!ip5i M53K ^DW ii^p^i yiiSD^n^D^^rriiiki. "^i^b ■jiSD ,bi53': bian ,ib^na S'^a^i ,"]^nan ni7j ,hn^aN -ipn ")irii Dpni tT^^pri' o'^ps hixs ii'h^': tiisx iitjiij; na?!'' n''p''"itt D-'p^a i''pnb n-^an^ ,iyri nyn j^npfi ^ih-ipn "napqi T'^^PO ,'''i;'j ^s ,'T\)2ti u^n^ra 'n'cra nbji nas^ rii^^ Dhn-bx "ns-^piian ''^na-'-in ' ■'nb-irj. ™i^:i ,P'?^J!! ys^i Pia^i ^^P!"" b7^^5 ' Y'^l'i tD'^ni oss^' ^n^pM I (!2) -)psi ,nn''3r!''ri"T^N n^n^^ii'' inanrj n'^TiJa s;s*'i nijn is'^izin -s^irn rnijni a^in 11 risni • ■■ V T- •■ T • T T T T- ,.."__- 1 alii m'^N § bd. Chrestomathia II B. § 71—74. 41* ms^in ,^'^m siiB ,Tipi^ atsn jSicri .'^i^a ^nsiis » I X • - -: r A" V : t -; i- ta'^iflF) ,ii53''ip ."^T j^rd^TB ,Dis ■^nais'i '^nab §72. .riffis^ n'^yj; t-i'-fflis; mi ,D^'TDb tia^ipsi "na'^oNii oipNi isip^^^'i; {^ ,1':;^ ^s^1,^5 ,^Vb^s5 lb t\= ^^3^bi ,ib •lE^a'ii n^^n nBts a b^sn^i b^Bri':i t|b|i5a %b ' § 73. nb ,ahb 'na;;;^iibi5 on fyptsna' ^b^n':^ ' ^bbn ' ^ibbri ,bba ,]nNri-rik ^h'bj) ,tjw-nx '-jsr! ,di% tans .iijilis: ,?'Tib y^n^ ,w:)M ,t|b j^3'',wri "isri 'bnn inn ! liiria "Pbj? '^fiisn D^s;]q ns'^brini ™'l?^ H ^ti*i^ ni^TBS nxv (!2) nx"i5 f^^^l ™&n nBori §74. nr^iw ,rfBs nsia n'^T n2?n nDax nbsj?' na'is noyj? n'^ssx nio?ri n'f ?,: ri.;?' nb^,^ i ;]''|5T23rii tf^y iiriay n'^iajy ■^ri^sj: | Tf'iir^fj "'O"'!!? i^!?)? "^k •^'i?? f' niibyrj^ ri'^byri ^r^ii? ori'^bijb O'P'ft' ^'^TV? ^^'^^y nbyrii ' ripTij'n "n"ipt^ naraa hbs nia nap nyir 11 Tviv : (t : • t': • t : • t» t t t't t t niD?b nj<')r nipprtb n'nujb ni37jb I irb? riNi^n nnj^icn nnps nii^^ri nnpy nrts? i n^i^-^ nis^Sri sibrV iiip^ ^K">D siNT^iiKT Jisn III II nnxiD 'nnx'i -. ;- It • ;■ : • : T T -: :• t -: it 1 § G5h. 42* Chrestomathia II B. § 74—76. ^s-r "&?ri ''snri "x'lri iibyri sipip: ^ipffirri ii&i';5 '^?b "^"1 ''^? "'^2; ,^'ffl?,: ^S*l!] *i3?,!l!! *i'^?P '®?fl t]^':' ii:*:V 1^^ Fiiiiisi ^"^ini iV II ^pirn ^i)y ^synn l?Fi!! i?!!i ,D':':^a'pN! Wbni ,2>rini ,(!2) j^^i^i Ni^ist; by!>i ,03nri5 t'i:?i«5 ',(5) n.^SKi Dini TB?n-SK byn'i I ninriTprt D'^iripcp ;]^.':'Lnpni ^innpsi iin^^'.'l T? Qipa-bia II '.'liisp na":!!' ^"isipii .na';^! n's'in '.''bK riDB jnsB Tiji^'i'b nn^n D'^aian ^^oxa p4< jci"isa IT •• •■ : IT • r : IT a* ~ "= 'i H-jpxi xnrisi N53t2 ^!!<53t2 ^'nxtan iixiir^i nx^isTr xbin 55pp-:5 anNDip. ^spriri-bx ! D^ribN "b N-^a ^inti ib 'l .^rix'^p? D^J^'^P? T^.5P § 76. ntjn .n;xra3ri rij^ipi ci^'^tTpD ^ntss|i jj^'en^ Drixis? .Ttri nisn ^s^i .s3-'tDn ,nbns< ti^ii ,n^'^t:2n lyir ',nt3n ^N'^Ti-bN ■'xn-'pi-bK i<^^n-bx ni<^'' N^'' .ns35 .npsn AT * " • : I* " T • - T ^'T "T X» 'vt * ^i>«:2; ,Ni:.*'i iiii^n ^s:^^: ^is^^^;: nKii; -n^l^b ntj^,;; (!2) M^-'pti QriNisin riK^iaii*' x^iain inxVa ,fqT!n >«nni Nias >5bN ^i'sa '^xa .nisi"'2in5 "^ti^ii .,«5ini ^N'a-i? -sha iKaa nnari Q^i^an ' ishsV nsi^api .^x'^a*':! iis^-^an s^ar' ■'fisaini iix-'an ■'i^a^i-jiD-xa 1 § 826. 2 § 87ej3. Chrestomathia II B. Eep. 43* 'ns&; ixb 5t|bi ni? n^n: na^b sibi; iib?i ^"iria 5?!? yiifii iw'jd ^'b) riT^^ ' .(!2) '''liii'.G'a) x^Dj .(!2)'!in'i ''nn-b>ii J^iiisri d^ImS 3>a Tini tj^ais toti ii. ':jy;ib 'ittNn-biii"i3>;n?a 'i^idi 'n-mx Nin-; !:|;.5''5>n din 'rb' n^p ' j;i-n7^bTi3i$ -i^jj^in-bN; ' ', bTS|in xb y^^n bs^-bx ibBsn!) ""nririn-bN! ^ii':iN b'ssa vtib ^S'l?''^ nij)! rb?a"ii^Trnf 'rs'^yii ^y:)i''n nNT-fs .':}nb tjbij! ^3^03 {tjajN tin '''nai^b 'na^'Tflpn' ^"is^b ^?a Diij ^rr: npb 'ni'^na 'n '.yV''^T^ '^^ ^-^'rf^' ^'^i ni^^': :'d'in' "b-ntor-iT^ i^T^ i<'b "b 'n q;:;htt 'n "•.dinab-bsa wisn ini^ Dni??i"'n-nN 0"?^- "^^1^ %? ^^'tT^^ ^^ (P*""^ 6' 6—11) 1 § 84c. 2 § 83c. ' § 46ep. * § 64. 44* Chrestomathia II B. § 78—79. ^nz niirn b'l^ "ria-i? '^'^^^V '^'^i?^ *^Ti^ ^'^T^ pan- t:Va nia^iin "t:?a ntta ' t:?5p J^iwiJ^^p Q^pn rnf5 ^ji2T2'[bNn|t7a"bn^^ '5?''^b| '^s'^rj^ ^^1?^^ ■'/j^'iia'iDiJ'^TB'ia iiTt^^r iT'is'i-c qnri72 ^JTcn n^^TS I V -:iT : § 79. 'iijj ':?!!^2? '^pribir "Mtj "px^©- "pais "pbsji ''ihp^ Fisw ^'nifln wyT ' ^nini' ^rr^pi ^nj? is^a inrii< It;'' t* I TT T- tt; t"" tt; tt-; - TT -: : *- • v; iv : ~t -: 1 :-•■-■: ! : - t : ■ ; att -: "rjiitisip :]^b53a "piisni ■'pi^isx "P^^OO?- "P^^ll ^'.diiano mpsiii" D^ia?i ^ni^Sn ^ih^ari : • ' T : t-;i- \ • < *•/ ■ 'ppi^a "pnrtTp '?JD";3Tni "?Fil?ib "pn'iap^ "pr^ia? "'.nraiBi nnjisni ^3n''"i:£ lawna ttnii::^?^ t;-; t:-*; t»» t;-; t t; rnni rnpiao '^"ri?!?? T*^^?'*^^- T'*^^'^'^'f7 ^'*^'''?'"in''] ' §70. Chrestomathia II B. § 79. 45* diiiDsna {713^:259 !in3iiS5p iinsisT? -^wy: ^^id^t " '■^^'^?X ^Tfit^ ^T^^^) ^^wf? "^"5?i?' \3?3Tij?i "??:?i^:: ■^ja'ffl'; 'rjS^T^':' ^3Fi'^ '^PbV^,'! f^PP^?^!^ ^'?')^^ tS^^'^ >iniB5o':i ^irannp.'i ^ns'iri^i ^'^!?!'5'5 ^nn^Tii'^i ^tiis'^i'li -SFii?" .^nj^Tf n;: '^inby^i iin^i^'^i iroip^i (27,21 '"^ipai?;!) ntoyn riN'isi nxn'^i' rijifijp^i tiio^y^ Ci^ipi^?^ 0=^')'?'^! ciii^ai^i QjS?:: DT?i*:!!'Qj'ip!'i u'-ci?^) Dtcab^i "^^^^i^?- tj^nnr '^^tiBTc': ''p^iribuji^i T^'^*:C "P^^^T ''I'^S'^^'n^ iinn?!''] ^ni52'^5 Ti^^y^ '^'^T^^^ '^^t???-' '^^^''^-' '^^'^'i' .'D!!arip':i' ciixjj^'ji CD^prin !0ii3?i n^nsb-: .^n'3 "sn^Tpni ,''?t27bri "^pii^a ^Dn^TB "p'lab "p^^r; iisjrpu r;^i!*":^it7 0?i?1 ^^)t'^ 'P^J^^^'^sn "p^piiin l\))i^y ^t^btD^ ':jp!i*a': '^ipT'; "'P'^i''?'^ "pribffiPi III. Konig I, 366. 46* Chrestomathia II B. § 79—80. Eep. Hit'np^^ *in):tB^5 ^!ii<^'f*:!! *l'^*?':I?': ^!nt?|^*:!i '^^11^ DNteFi dn)3^i i=il?i?^?','3 ^'^tJ^T^Pi ^^iis'^^ nrijjsi nsn^^ii !inn]5»:: ^nV:£ari ''^'^'**T;] "'P^^^?': '•'ia?t3ri tirbi'i^ T : ' T I- ••. T • Di beforetime. || in:=^a §68i. II St^i?"; Ipf. frequentative: they (one) used to call. II. WSa nan'} . . a'^b's nan subordinated in English: as w. ipf., of. V. 14."27.'|| htea rising ground. |; nta §45e5. || tsi^'n §17o. j| 13. Tisn Acc.§83c. ||.nn'aan §20c. || di^ns §i7e. || 14. n!i«:ii5>(propiy. Inf. of K'i|5=iTni5) to meet, ohviam. \\ 15. "B 'jljst n'bs uncover the .ear of some one, i. e. reveal, disclose something to some one. 16. ina nS3 to-morrow at this time. II ''Pi"'!*'; cf. Ex. 2, 25. 3, 7. II 17. '^niax "liax of whom I have spoken §87/". || "ISS hold back, restrain; 3 coercere imperio, rule over. [IS.liis*! here w. Ace, more frequently with "^K. || nj iX §42/". || 19. SnlfaNI . . nlpS §64(?. 1; 20. riianxbt h: in regard to. || ab Qsiir animum advertere, h or "bs. 21. iT^i'Sfl § 82 o. II The second IMIU denotes subdivisions of the tribe (as Num. 4, 18. Jud. 20, 12), if the text is correct (aaiU?). II 22. nsiul? chamber (in which the sacrificial feast was celebrated). |! IB''^ § 39. || 23. njn § 67 i. || n;a part, share, portion. 48* CHRESTOiUATHIA. III. 24. pTO crus. I' tfbsm §17a note, j; tJiia §726. ji "iSisi pi-obaMy: for this (the) meetihg. !! IJasV as I said to the cook (the text seems to be corrupt here). 26. nsinri out of doors (on the street). || 27. ibS^^I that he . . , cf. §46ep. il 0113 now. Ii Chap. 10, 1 TjQ viol. || ps*1 §70. h) 1 Sam. 25. I. na'ia §17/3. Also "I'nXB, -pM, iia"i3 are proper names, so V. 3 bai (as appellative: fool [often=godless], see v. 25), b";5ias, V. 10 iu:\'il 2. ntoo here=possessions. II Vwa §73^7. H "laVs §^re: a Calebite, of the family of Caleb. II 5. QnX3>l . . ^bs §64c. 6. "^n^ (§17ca)=iri> (to the life), salve. II laft^C nnxi §89e. j 7. QISa^aT! §61c. II 1J;B here and v. 15: miss. || 8. IT^a^i . . blXCi §46ep. II 1S25?3';1 as an optative. II 133, translate ace. to the Q^re «xi:. II 9. inm Vulgata: siluerwnt. II 10. la^i §73^. || ■j'tiBVn break away. II lisns, 'cf. W-'iHx v. 14. 17. § \9d. II. '^Vlrtgb) and should I take away? §42^. II iiroa meal of slaughtered meat. |{ 12. T^^f^ here intr. : turn, turn' back. || 14. a"^" (arj) attack (with words), scold, a. II 15. '^a'? §87m. 17. "la^a Cja away from . .) so that one cannot speak to him. II 18. dnb §39^. II tlflias K'^thibh as Vi, mw Q^re as i"b (il"ii) "prepared", i. e. slaughtered. 1| ""lap parched corn. || S'^pBS cakes of dried grapes. II 20. IHii "iro hidden part of the mountain, i. e. depression. 21. IplsV for nothing, pro nihilo, frustra. II 22. QX §90a.c. II "in'i; V mingere. T^pa I'^Piiaa i. e. all persons of the male sex. || 23. i-im ^nam §84a.e. II isa (^? + "a) from off. II y-ix ace. loci. \i 24. ^3 I pray! II 25. ^K c. ind. §41,3. 26. ^Ti §9067. II ItUK like OTi recitativum (i3 §90e) to intro- duce direct speech: utique. II d^OT bloodguiltiness. II SBini, as in v. 33 inf absol., dependent of ^a in Siaa; ?i"!i and ^1^ are nomina- tives of the subject. English: that thou camest not (from coming) in bloodguiltiness and thy hand helped thee not (from helping thee). Cf. Ewald §351c. II b^fflp3ari'l §176. 60&. II -bs in regard to. j] 27. nWJI Waw cons. perf. D 28. Xto §76e. II ^la'ja from the begin- ning of thy life on. II 29. dp*1 forms with ilT/im a conditional sen- CHRESTOMATHIA III. 49* tence without a conditional particle : "and should anyone arise . . then will", cf. §88e. II ^S^rf? of. Tjisx G. 2, 17, v. §55e. D ^^S bind together, tie up; lilS bundle. II nit with, apud. II Sb\3 I. Ill sling; S^]5 a sling, 'pn t(S hollow of the sling. II liJjV ~\'!V. and appointed thee (to he) a prince. 31. Apodosis to V. 30. njSSlB and ^iuj=a offence. II n-i=t"i . . Tjini. §88ea. II 32. Tirtuj §79/1. 11 33^ iin>:? from nVb V. §75e;8uff.§79cZa.|] 34. 5>'ina Inf. Hiph. of SS-\. II "13 . . ■is, the ^V introducing the con- tent of the asseveration (§90a) is here repeated before the main clause of the oath. II TiXlam Ivpsus calami for "^xbril, Konig I, 647 sq. 36. lite thereat, at the feast. II 37.n«sa §76^. II 39. "i^a Dem enim Davidis causam ita egerat, ut David a Nabal poenas haberet.\\ '3 ^a^"^!] spoke concerning her=wooed her. ■41. Q^M with her face. II 43. ^hirnD-Da both of them. c) I Kings 3. 1. infe with b §846. II 3. na'bb §45/'. II )Wi proper name, n^ §20ea. II !lte^ Impf. without Waw consec. in historical connexion and without frequentative signification almost exclusively poetical, except after ts (v. 16), dVu:, Q'i-j:?. 6. IlIJN? according as, as. 11 Sal? n^lT"; uprightness of heart ('1 only st. constr.). II ist33 §6/3. II nw di*? as is now the case. 7. 'S'l^ S'i I know not (how to). II 8. a'la, "(a for, by reason of. 9. Fins'! give therefore, li 153 here: great in number. ' ii. EJBiaa here: cause (at law). 1 13, inn; §476. II 14. ilTO^sn^ §65»w. II 15. ')'|3i1, another reading is ]^)b*1 §69a. II Dio^iu peace-offer- ing (with accompanying sacrificial feast). 16. n;xijn§76A. II 17. ^al pray (thee). II i>n;§64^. II 18. imib §68/; h periphrasis of the Geuetive. II nb>lT and 'VhV save, except. || 19. Th'h ace. temporia to the question : when ? II "laJK because. 22. 1= Ni nay ! but. II inn §17c. II 24. ini5 §67A. il 25. in cleave asunder, divide. II nnx §89 a. 26. n;a— iu3s whose son §87a. II ni?np ^ilas? her love had become too strong, she was overpowered (laa of doubtful etymo- logy, of. Priedr. Delitzsch, The Hebrew Language p. 40—42). || nani §63i. II 28. ^x-iii §76^. H. S track, Hebr. Gramm» II. D 50* CHRESTOMATHIA III. d) Psalm 121. 1. nVs^ the ascent, pilgriaJsge (to Jerusalem). il YiKQ whence. 11 2. BSa the help is with J. and comes from him. II IPT^K and Q^J^'^X. ^K c. ipf., esp. ia poetry often as strong suhjective nega- tion, as If: hy no mean*. II nss^ §76e, Suff. §22ia. fisn of the in- jurious effects of the sun, as in Isa. 49, 10. |j 8. W . . 'ja from . . to (more frequently even than IS . . "ja). e) Psalm 127. 1, fijs'bia^ belonging to Solomon. (According to most scholars also here the so-called b auctoris). II Klia adverbial Aoc. : in vain. || 2. nae5-i^rixa (you) who sit up late. II s;ia Aramaic spelling for nJliJ [ace. temporis, v. to I Kings 3, 19). II 3. &^5a and )aan i-iQ are subject. II 5. TOa': §71i. II "13 §88a. II ism t. e. in court. f) Psalm 130. 2. asp prop, pricked up, (of the ear) : attentive U 6. ''12333 supply: wai'teth. i dilaiaa, ^a §826. VOCABULARY.' ax 38. las} § 66a. nax § 66 a. ■jiiaK poor. bax mourning §25/1 bai< mourn §65%. lax stone *28. p'ax II wrestle §656. "laS pinion, wing. "last gather. nnax §36e. liSx lord §19(J. *23. D'lK man; genly. collect. nanx §346. ipX '§10C4. nnilK cloak *36. ank (e) §666. bnx tent 28 ff. bllK pitch one's tent. ■'bis perhaps. db!IX, b^lKI on the contrary, ne- yk § 29c. ' [vertheless. list shine §7li. V. "liN light. fVllit II agree, consent *71. ItK ear *28. ITX T give ear to *65. "itx gird *65. m' ninx 38. nm one'§39a. IPIK 66 0. *65. ii-inN possession *22. iriK § 666; in morari 65c. "rk, '•'yy^ § *3 6. ni'nflS end, last state. a^JK enemy lid. fT?«, aj, § 42/: b-iK ram *29. * The Arabic figures correspond to the numbers of the para- graphs; § refers only to the grammar,* only to the exercises; numbers in parentheses indicate the paragraph according to which the accompanying word is to be inflected. The Boman figures (r — ^VII) with verbs indicate the conjugations; V alone signifies: causative. Unpointed verbal forms are found in the §ai either not at all or very seldom. 52* vocabclaky. ni*st, rt*K §36^. ■)-:k'§41,'2. la^K 38. ~6< 1. in truth, surely; H. only. Vss 66 a. ^Dii food. Vn §43 cs. iiX §41,3. n^N oath (32). Cl'^n^K God *22. obit dumh %2id. Cl'bX thousand *28. DN if §88; optative particle §8 9c; interrogative part. %i2c.d; tax and xb-dX with an oath §90. nx mother *26. max 38. nsK 39/". rifflX nation *22. ■^QSV believe; 11 he lasting, sure. yax he strong §65. -\-a& 66 a. lax speaking *36. "lait §280. rriaN utterance *35. nnix sigh *34. C)5X he angry 65^ qOK §66 a. §64?. ID!* hind 65. f)6t anger; dM. nose, face *26. nsK §66a. Kiss §42^. pSX VII refrain one's self. lax ashes. 3!ix lie in wait §65. ■pIX chest, ark; with art. 'liisn. irnx path *28. i-lX lion *30. "^SJ he, hecome long V. Tj^X §25A. t^'liJ length *28. y"n^< earth, land §17d *28. i;ix I. m curse 73. m'iire *26. nm 38. n&TO quiver. •mk 1. relative particle §16i. §87; 2, that; 3. because. laJN in call happy. ''|il!JX (only pi. St. con.) blessed- nesses of the . .=blessed is the. . D'l-iajX steps. nx, -rix with §43e. nx, -nx (ace.) §43/". ■|inx she-ass *23. a §45. ■ixa well *22. IZJxa stink; V. 133 garment 28 f. ^'13 V part. bn3 11 be amazed ; III causat. nari:a §34(J. XiB 76A; V bring. 613 tread on. ffli3 §7U'. §77. n|3 despise *74. 113 plunder *73. ■niins youth, pi. Di"n!ir:3. ^na prove. ")n3 choose out. VOCABULABT. 53^ naa trust (a in); V. 'fiSi womb, stomach *28. 'pa discern, understand §72 ; VII consider, give heed; bx to. '(•^a §43e; >..')ia between .'. and. iii"'a understanding. n^a 38. fiDa weep 74. ■•» ""Sa weeping *30. i>S*^a worthlessness. i^a confound §73w. Sba swallow. naa high place (32), esp. as site of religious worship. naa, naa §45e.^. 13 38. nsa build 72. "l&a sour grapes §28o. ^Sa lord ?28. DilsSa §86c. nsa III §656. ' ' spa I, III cleave. nspa valley *35. "l]5a morning. "ipa (large) cattle. laija seek 606. N'na create *75. itna creator §24e. Tai"ia cypress. rrna'flee 65. ri'i'ia bar. ni'na covenant, 'r^'na'knee *28. T^-ia III bless Goh.r. na'na blessing 34d liua 'flesh *25. ■r T "liaa III bring good news. na 38. ina piece cut off (from the sac- rifice) *28. h^i redeem. ^xa redeemer 24 e. saa (23). lia'a hero *22. Iia?, lord. "laa (e) be, become strong. laa man (mostly poet.). rras. §366, aa' roof *26. ■ina §306. i'la (e) be great. ii'ia greatness §28«. Sla III break in pieces. 'n^a §25e. ■lia (§196) nation, people. Sia expire. Iia sojourn (as stranger) Jlir. 1ia shear 73 h. ■|ina belly ^^23. S'^a'valley §29a. ^■^a rejoice §72(?. nVaba skull 36 5. n^ 5 a) reveal ; HI uncover ; II. IV. pass. ; VII uncover one's self. — 6) go into exile, V lead into exile 74. Tfb^ the captivity ; the exiles 37a. rta ni shave (the head). V?i roll 73. Da also; na. ,&a et.et. xaa V give to drink. ^aa a) wean ; 6) do, render { 54* VOCABULiKY. 'bm camel 26(2. las cease. ■ja garden *26. ^ii steal. "iBa cypress. (?) 'j'ns threshing-floor 28 J3. laia usu. in, drive out 65. dira heavy rain (28). im be anxious, distressed. nVifl, pi. B"i., fig-cake. (52^ (e) cleave, hold fast to. ia^ word 256. 13^ speak 60 e. ij fish *24. na-l fish collect. *33. 15^ com. "m generation, yEVea *22. I'^'n judge 72. nVl! /". door *28. bt blood 24 e. T Ttra'^ likeness; image. nsa'ii tear, also collect (35). ';^S^ extinguish. pSfl overdrive (the cattle). Tjll V make to walk, guide. •^[•tn way *28. 1U|^^ seek, search. q §42. "ilfl majesty (25). lin splendour. ■lin woe I ah ! Tin goods, treasure. n;fj §766. is^h palace *24.. T|>vJ go68i. §64A; Vnwalk*62— III Part. T^iifTO advancing vigorously. iiin PS'ci §73c; Pi. praise 73. ■jiati noise, tumult *23. -fr\, ViiTi see §40^. ■^Bii vertere 65. ■nn mountain *26ce. ntJlS §11/". na'nn §74!i>8. S'nn' slay 65. trin conceive, be pregnant 74. D^n pull down 65. SKt wolf. naj §83^. nat slaughter, sacrifice ; III sacri- nat slaughter, sacrifice. [floe. ht'§16a.6. §425'. n.i, !|1 relat. §87° note. am gold (25). lit §72^. trit §29a. lat remember. "ist memory, memorial (28). ')'i"i3t memorial 23 rf. dal purpose §73». asj' §25a. njj go a-whoring; Part, hsil b?1 anger *28i. [harlot. pSJ cry out §65. npSt cry *34. ')|3t senea; 25 d. 'ipj be old. ')|5t beard (bearded chin) *25. "ij strange (22). S^ll arm. TOCABOLABT. 55* S-yi, seed *28. S'lj sow. Kan II hide one's self. pan folding of the hands (as sign of idleness). man weal, scar. laan hind, hind up 65. ■nan gird, gird on (sthg.). JTnjn girdle *22. inn (e) cease, leave off §65A. b'ln leaving off §25fe. lU'nh month 2Sh. tin (i"'n) be in labour, tremble nain wall. [§72in spare. y!in J. street, lane; 8. adv. out- side. irsin (lain) make haste §72i. nth seer *31. pin be firm. III make firm, for- tif3' ; V seize, usu. w. ^ or ace. pin strong. Kan sin 7.5. nxan see. nan, |j?. D^, wheat. ■in living §906. O'l^n riddle. nfn, -in (pe*-/.) §76c. n*n beast, often collect. 6'i'»n life *22. t'^n, SM/^. ib'^n i. strength; pin bosom *22. [5. wealth. ^n palate *26. Qsn be wise 6bh. nan wise §256. aVn milk *25. a'Sn fat *28. blVn dream *22. I'bn sickness 30c. nVi^n §90c. l>Vn, III i>fen profane, "V begin 73. itn pierced *25. D^n dream 65. C)Vn pass by, V change, alter. p^n part, divide. p%r\ part *28. an, nian §38. Dh warmth, heat *264 Ian desire §65. nflan preciousness, precious nan wrath, anger. [things. "■nan ass *22. ban spare 65. ban be warm. ban violence, injustice *25. ttSan §390. ■jn favour, grace *26. nsn encamp §74. y&n merciful. bsn 1. gratis, 2. frustra. ■jsn be merciful, pity; VII (pray for mercy) 73. t)5n profligate §25/". Ibn mercy, kindness *28. nbn take refuge §74. n'libn stork. Ibn want, be without 65^. Ibn wanting §25/". V6n take pleasure, desire, feel inclined. I'Sn taking pleasure §25/\ 56* VOCABULARY. ■f'Slj pleasure; pi. pleasing, pre- cious things *28. ISri dig 65. nan halve §74. isn'half §390. ■[Sri bosom, sinus §28o. "nsn court 25 d. ph statute 26 e. n;3n do. *ii. a^n' sword *28. na'in §35a. I^n tremble 65A. V n'i'nn trembling, terror §34(J. n'nn burn §74 ; ib n it burned ■within him=he grew angry. lU'i'in ploughing. Bin V devoveo §65jb. na'in §35c.6. ttjin T be dumb, silent. la^n deaf §24(J. "^Virj hold back §65. tlian make bare §65ft. 3i2Jn aesHmare 65. •^^ajn darkness *28. nn fear §26c. tin broken. "inn Vn ally one's self (in mar- ■|nh father-in-law*24. [riage). inn son-in-law *25 ; bridegroom. nnn be terrified §73^.0. naa slaughter §65e. naa l. cook, 2. executioner. nsaa signet-ring 36 e. "lint: clean, pure. ins3 be clean. Til purify one's self §626. *65in. aia he is good §77. aiB good. nn-j Pi'lel §746. »TSO be unclean, III defile, II defile one's self *76. Vau unclean 25^. D^Q taste, metaph. understand- D^a not yet; d'naa before, [ing. t)'ia flay, IV pass. bx"' V take in hand, wish, will }p^ V conduct (66). [*68. Vy^ become dry 69a. Uia^ dry 25 f. sa|i be weary 68 d. lj^ fear §54c. §77. i;V. hand 24 e. nil V. vn. §76/". "f"!^ lover, friend. nii-i'i §96. n^bi'i §36i. af 38. bail by day. n;ii dove *22. njsSii sprout '*36. in; §68/-. ifln^ Mwa. bni. III bni and V b'^nin wait, aa; 69. [on b, Vs. ■j^^ wine *29. nai V judge, rebuke ""68. hbl 6Sg. §54e. VOCABULARY. 57* *i>; QSf.c.b. ■1^^ son, child *28. V?-' V howl §69i. O^ sea *26. ^a1 V turn to the right *69. pr 69 a, V.suok. *1b^ §68i. q&5 I- "V add *68. §77. §84. *iO'j III punish, rebuke, II pass. "li"; appoint §esd. [*68. ^'iiK 'iS? for the reason that, be- cause. T|S^ become weary 68i. yS'^ advise; II. VII take coun- ns; beautiful (31). [sel 68d. •'S';'§30e. NS^ leg. as"i VII § 70. as"i V §70. SS"! V §70. ps: §70. "iT^ flngere § 70. iT^fiffulus §2id. ns; §70. n)?^ §68e. »1?^ §68/". 7!?: §69 a. §77. -ijr; §68e V. ffljs'i fowler. xn; leg. §68 rf. S^^ timens § 25^. nxV §55. *35. 'Ti'^'esf. nn;, I. V. §76 f. ny^ moon. "^T, 25 e. ai-i^ (e) 68 i. ii:.':i§40«' aia^ 68/".— c. ace. §83 J. ami inhabitant *24. nSiHD'^ help, safety. ]i&^ sleep 68 (i. ']1U'; sleeping 25/". Stti"! V help, save (68). 5»iij.|i, Sffl;; salvation §28to. "ilij"' uprightness. Qin"! orphan. "ini n remain over, V *68. ?§45. 2X3 feel pain *65 in. 133 be heavy; II be honoured; 133 heavy §25A. [Ill honour. &a3 wash 60e. iaa3 lamb. niaia, '3 §356. 12:33 subdue. 13 pail (26). !13 thus (w.ref.to what follows); n3-1S hither. nn3 go out (of a light) §74. "|!l^' priest *24. 3313 star *24. 'i>13 V set up, prepare; II pass. 3t3 he 25 6. [*71. ri'3 strength *22. in3 III dissemble *65 I. iun3 m infitiari *65 I. '''3 1. for; 2. if, when, iav §88; with oaths and affirmations §90, rtn? 13 and IK 13. §90. V3 totality, all, whole *26. 58* VOCABUtAKY. N^S keep back *75. 3^3 dog *28. ^■^3' ^3te §72<7. 11^3 be finished, III finish, cease "♦t*. §84. ri|3 daughter-in-law *22. iVs 38. t3^3 V put to shame ; dishonour, injure any one; II be ashamed, be put to shame. na? §45e.i?. )'s thus, so. ":3 V bring down, abase. t)33 wing §25a, nD3 III cover 74. t)D3 silver 28»*. t)3 (hollow of the) hand *2p, IBS atone 60 e. 1B'3 ransom *28. •13 lamb.' a>i^3 cherub. Ci"i3 vinej'ard *28. tris cut off, destroy ; n'^'na '3 make h'OS §77. [a covenant. 3n3 write. ntts §36 f. rn3'§25e. rir3 §36c. >§45. nV §41,1. hijV become weary, .V §74top. ds\'§26d. aV heart *26. aaV heart §25c. tSsV §41,5. m\ (e) put on , ''bib §88. ia>lb knead *71. inb cheek, jaw 30 6. snb II proeliari §64?. Sh^ bread 28 ». b-iV night *29. nb';b §20c; hb-i^n §i7a. T^'i'fb) spend' the night 72rf. "isb capere. lab learn, III teach. nab, iiab §45e6. tSSp V give to eat. I^b scoffer. nisb take (away) 67 ^. ag'b I. Ill gather. •jilU^ tongue *23. ■ixa very. htta hundred. nolsta anything whatever. 'lixa luminary *23. bDXa food *24. ftbika §36c. •jXa ill refuse §65&. bNO despise, reject. b'naa tower *24. ya shield *26. bi'isa wanderings *22. ^ana desert *24. rt^a the measure. T • SSl^a why? (for what reason?). rta, ia %l6e.f. %i5e.g. "liia III make haste 65 fe. §84. VOCABULARY. •■59 Bira stagger *71. TfyVm birth, concrete family *36. isi'a i. point of time; S. feast (feast-day); 3. meeting, as- Vtrfm fear 246. [sembly 24 e. nisia dwelling *24. rw 7ii.M. no §29 e. TDI^ altar 24 e. nna blot out*?*. Tnna vision *31. n.:r,a camp *3i. noi^a refuge *31. "ibna want. ~na to-morrow. na^ana purpose *33 II. naa tribe, staflf *3l. ^aa V cause to rain. la, iFi'i la §89^. b'la 38. 'pa kind §22i|3.^. ntoa covering (31). ■isa sell. xia be full, ace. §836; lU fill 75. xiJa full 2bg. ^st^a SyysXo4 246. nVa salt. nan^a 36 o. T T : ■ " asa III save, II pass, and «/?. T|^a regnare. V. T^^a king 28 A. nssa queen 35 ff. nttisa »-e^«M>« 37 a. iia II circumcise §73w. V^a speak. ns^aa kingdom 33 6. h^fea rule *33 II. la §44. §826.— Often compounded with other prepositions: Fisa, BSa, bsa; ^ bsa above. nsa count 74. T T nrjsisa rest. rriiJa candlestick, nrjia gift, mealoffering *35. SOa hoM back. iQpa §24e. ISM number 24a. iS5>a track. ■nSa stagger, slip. CiSa little; asas nearly; soon, rtsa upwards. [speedily. di^jtea deeds, actions. '='^1???? depths. ■jSa, only : ISa!? J. for the sake of, on account of; 2. 1lb turn aside 71a;. nSD booth *22. HnibO forgiveness. 3>Vd rock (28). TjaO uphold, support §83^. fiillSO blindness. ISd uphold, sustain §83^'. nisb §34c. IBd complain, plangere. nSS carry off *74. 1BD count; HI relate. 1SD book §28. sriD I. Ill stop (e. ff. wells). inb V conceal; 11 refl. ins 1. what is hidden ; 2. cover- ing, shade, defence. 62* VOCADHLAEr. 1?S 65, serve, c, ace. §83e; till (the ground). nas servant *28. 12S iransire 65. i"i3S Hebrew. ^?? §28^- nias tiiiWa 356. n^js §346. IS '§43 a. IS §22. tris §33 a. rflis § 37 o. ■IW V protest, bear witness *71. lis §40/". [§64». bis unrighteousness. dVlS eternity. ■|is sin 23 c. tp fly, tjais do. *71. 1|IS Wind §24«J, IS strength 26 e. IS goat §26a.&. aiS leave, forsake 65. IIS help c. ace. §65. Its help *28. !Tn-JS §36^. a'^Vbird of prey, coll. *29, "I'^S eye, spring *29. TiS 38. TiS §29 6. b'-|1S §26d bS §43 0. nbs go up 74. n^S burnt offering. rh:s §3ic. "to rejoice, be merry. n^ato virgin *35. DS people 26 CE. OS with §43d las stand 65. "iJiHS Ammonite §376. ias exert one's self, labour, Sat. baS labouring §25/". pas be deep, pas valley *28 HI. ass grape §25c. njs answer 74, c. ace. §83 e. njS be bowed down ; III oppress, humble; VIT humble one's .■i?S misery *30. [self 74, •^iS 310. • T 'pS ni bring clouds together 1&S dust *25. [§736. ^s\ree 24/. ass pain, hard work *28. ass II. VII be grieved. ■jiass sorrow, toil §23d:. D"'3SS idols. na^s pain. nss counsel *33. Vss lazy. dSS bone,, pi. ni *28. 1SS hold back, shut up. n'nss §365'. ai3S§«5i. aps take by the heel, cheat. aiS VII mix (in), mix with, hold intercourse with. a^S evening. ani raven *24. SIS pant. ills III uncover, empty §74s, di-iS naked §26rf. VOCABULARY. 63* tl'lS an-ange, prepare *65. b^S uncircumcised §2 5 A. ^ns foreskin *35. abs'herb *28. nirs do 74. §65^. lias m tithe. "ffSS to smoke. ■jias smoke *25. "IBS V enrich. 11^9 riches (28). hS time *26. npl? now. pns V strike one's tent, set for- ward *65. Irs pray ; II hear (prayer). lita ni §656. "15B corpse *28. 12!5B ace. to light on, meet any fTiQ redeem. [one. ri>nQ redemption. riB 38. ^sia I. II scatter 71o. s. V. HQ snare. ins shake, tremble. lljB fear, terror (28). S^B stream (28). a'^sB one escaped. Vsr^ judge; VII pray 73. njB turn § 74. T T ^J MSB corner, 'B UJKI cornerstone. Cs'iJB face 31a; "^JS^ in the pre- aence of, before; '^JB? before me, before my face ; '^IBa from ■''SiJB interior *37. [before &c. n^J'^JB pearls. bSB work *28. BSa time *28; DSBn §17a. psa II be disquieted. >1SB open (the mouth). SSb wound *28. 1)58 visere; Y praeficere. n)5B open. IB young bullock 26 cs. niB II to part. nns be fruitful 74, ■'iV fruit 30 c. -nii V break 73 A-. UJIB horseman, p?. diffllB. T T J ^ ■ T IT Biaa V strip TtvA Tt. SB3B transgression (28)»- HB morsel 26 c. nria stand open; V make wide. nriB open. hns door *28. ina expound. '{XX small cattle. xas host, army *25. 13S gazelle §30c. IS side 26 c. p'lflS righteous, just. pis be righteous. p'lS righteousness 28. nib-i:? rfo. §34a. llS^hunt *71. ilJS order, charge 74. nms cry *34. TT : -^ lilS rock 22. pns laugh. III joke 65. T^S venison *29. bs shadow *26. 64* VOCABULARY. nVs prosper ; V make to prosper, briEg to a prosperous issue D^S image, idol (28). [65 S. nia^S deep darkness. sSs '§25t. NOS thirsty 255-. nas sprout, V 65 s. 1SS pace, walk. 1SS pace. S)"'S3 veil, covering *23. 1152 small (23). pSS cry out. n;3SS cry *34. nSS spy, watch *74. lias sparrow *22. ■|SS I and V conceal. '- T IS oppressor, enemy §26c. iTnS oppression, distress (32). 1'13 be narrow 730. Y^p^ I. ni gather. lap bury. 13|5 grave *28. I^i? upoaxuvEW 73»i. lailp holy (23). UJ^p be holy; UI sanctify. UJIp sanctuary ; pi. devout offer- ings 28^. mp II assemble; III wait 74, h bip voice *22,-^?. ni. [on. Mp 71. I'ip thorns §29c.rf. rtlip beam. ■jap small 26 d. )'dp 1. be small; 2. small. "iBp III. V oflfer incense. Tfiap incense. ■C^p summer. Tip wall. ^^|3 I. n be of no account, de- spised; i^p curse 73. 'j'a'p §28w. •jp nest; pi. compartments of the ark *26. X5p in be zealous *75. fi3p parare, comparare *74. n,3p reed *31. ■j^p^nd *26. nsp end (31). •Jisp judge, leader (23). ■TiSp harvest *23. ISp reap. S'np call *75. 3^P (e) approach; V. 3^p approaching §25/'. a^p the inside *28. nip meet; V 74. ai-lp near (23). Ili'np town (mostly poet.).. Tip horn *28. aiBpV attend, hearken, h to. niap hard (31). Illip^ bind. hlflp bow *28. fiN'n see; V. 74. mi 38. UJNI poverty. ai much ; h'S'SI o f great strength a'l multitude 26 6. [(26). 331 be, beconie many 73. nail myriad *34. . VOCABOLAEY. 65* f^yi be, beoome many 74. sa-i' saS §390. ys^ lie (of quadrupeds). ii'}ioot *28. bsi HI spy out. iTi'n subjugate §74. 6)^1 pursue. TfO wind, spirit 22. mi V smell 71. D!i1 71; in. T raise. Y<['\ run *71. p11 V empty *71. ath bread *28. aifl"! street, square *22. QlfTi merciful, compassionate. BfTn III show compassion *65. WT} womb *28i. d^all'l compassion. Cjni III hover over sthg. *65. yrn wash *65. prfj, pirrn distant. a^V strive 72, Tl^ ^"^T^^. S"^"! plead D.'s cause. a'1'7 strife, cause (at law). tp"^ smell; nhisri "1 a sweet Ba- as'! ride, drive. [vour. "i&S-l §28«. fial throw: III deceive, rial lance *28. iBal move (esp. of smaller crea- iaa'n small animals. [tures.) Il'l shout for joy, exult §73. nST shout of joy. S|1 friend, neighbour. S'l wicked, subst wickedness *26. asn hunger *25. H. Straok, Hebr. Gramm.'' I. asi hungry 25/". US'! evil, wickedness, misfortune fiST pascere, pasei §74. [*22. nsS §3 la. SS'l (S'n) be bad, evil 73 o. KS'n heal §75. MB^ be slack § 74. ns"i murder. 7^5 III. Vn. §73c.e. S'lpT firmament (23). Vai'y wicked person *25. Saia (e) be sated, satisfied, ace. §836; V§65. sato satiated, full 25 f. saiu satiety, one's fill. ■naia III wait, hope, bx on. hnifl field 31a. mia (n^to) meditari §72i. ttlB (diip) set, lay 72. iasiio (iaito) exult 72. piniU laughter. daia show enmity to. iia'^ia canities *22. 'T'Dia hireling, day-labourer. baiB V have understanding. Vaia, ^ia understanding (28). "laia to hire. . ■nato hire *25. riaVia garment *35. naia (e) rejoice; HI make glad. haia rejoicing §25/1 nnato joy *35. n^oia garment *35. Wia hate 75. . KJia hater *24. E 66* VOOABUIjAKY. -iSto hair *25. trniriO barley, xpidai. nsiu §33a. pto sack *26. nto prince *26. D'^S'lto vine-branoh.es. t|^to burn. DNIU draw (water). isia (e) ask, demand; dftaJlsask after the health, greets with b of the person. IStlU n remain over; V. iT2V carry away captive §74. aau: staff, tribe *28. iliti captivitas, captivi *30. S312: n swear; V. 65. nsaiij (rtsoia) oath. "13123 break. Tnia lay waste §73^. Sll^ §29e. ni'ai 71. §84e. iiOTlD fox. tfiiD aim at, attack. a&iiu, aBiii judge *24. liia bull, ox. nniU VII Trpoaxu^sTv 74M)S. urilU slaughter *65. iniB dawn. nnia III. V corrupt, destroy; 11 be corrupt 65. llsiB overseer (24). T^ia smg §72 d. "I'^ia song. nilU set, place 72 d. asia lie down. TiSir, 13113 drunk. nsiB (e) forget. K'i forgetful of §26/". ^131)5 sink *71. isia become childless. tola, suff. iasia, shoulder. fiSUJ V rise early. ')iia dwell c. ace. §83d; V. Vi §25f. nbir send; III send away, Ttpo- •r^blU V throw. VI §61^. Vb-ii booty (25). dbl2J make good. d^ia integer 25 f, tJia name 24 /\ Dia there. lauj V destroy. naib thither. ta'iaia 38. D01B be desolate §73o. •jalU oil. Saiij hear. lai^ watch, keep; II take heed. ttJaiB m., f. sun 28. •jia tooth, ivory; d'^SlU teeth *26. H5ia repeat; II pass. *74. njlB year *33. njliS (^Z. Prov. 6,10) §330. ■'5123 second. riSia look towards 74. ■JSUJ^II lean. ISia gate *28. iinsir handmaid *35. KSlii judge. T]Bia pour out. VOCABULAKY. 67* 1|5UJ watch, be -watchful. npffl V give to drink 74. §77. ^15UJ shekel *28. §39/". y^ abhor. "i|3^'^ fisn, nia'inn, Di-ii^n, p'^iri!!, oittDnn", 2. Waw copulativum §§ 11 g. h. 46 (G 104, 2. D 15). A. ^The head and the foot; the great and terrible God (bK); David and Solomon; Joseph and Benjamin; ^Reuben and Juda; Jacob and Esau; Sodom and Go- morrah; hunger and sickness; man and God (§10c.). B. Complete the pointing of: Tin, pb'a?'! bsnto'^.' niBtt, u^'my^ pnic©, ij'isf , idsi, ij?''>si dOI?^' Wi^'''"' 1581, ytjibsi in^bs, n^si niy", issbtti in^nDTi lan, diitsi. ■ t: ' T • v: T . .. J T ■ T T ' ■ T : - T ; - : - - ' T i • 3. a, 3, b §§ 11 g. h. 45 (G 103, 2. D 14). 'To David and to Solomon; in Jerusalem and in Samaria; CHRESTOMATHIA. V. 69* in Edom; to a sickness; ^to Chananiah; to the Lord; in safety; ^like God. || B. To wisdom; "as the people (2); to the Amorite; to the sin (2); in the house; like the king. *^A father (am) I to the poor (man). ^®Thus (this /. sg.) did Joshua do to Jericho and to Ai (with Article!). C. Complete the pointing of : D'l'iSfSD, Cribsb, ^ifanV, injin^D, ss'; rvab, i^sa, itiK nab, tjirt^xa^ 1 1 niBsasi raib, D!5«'n''!5".— || D. With article: niia, nsTn niwa^l 4. )12 §§ 10 g. 44 (G 103, 2. D 14). 'He went out of the city. He went up out of Egypt. He took of the blood. From Jerusalem. ^ From the Lord. From Assyria unto Egypt. Greater (is) he than (§826) Reuben. ^Better (art) thou than Saul. 5. Nouns with unchangeable Vowels § 22 (G 91, 4. D 17. 19). 'The flock of Abraham; Joseph's cup; the voice of Jabweh ; the spirit of God; ^thy(w.) heroes; their (m.) heroes; thy (/.) gods, your (/".) ass; his flock; '"our strength; thy (/.) dead (m. sg.); thine (m. p.) ass; my city; '*his pilgrimage. '^Near (is) the day of Jahweh. Where (are) the idols of Samaria? Holy (is) Jahweh our God. Not as our rock (is) their rock. This Philistine (has been) a man of war from his youth. ^"^ These witnesses (are) lying witnesses. ^'Merciful (is) our God. — || B. 'The 70* CHRESTOMATHTA V. prayer of the 'upright (man); his daughter-in-law; • our booths; your (to.) burnt-offering;^ thy (Z'.^.) burnt- offerings; their (m.) wickedness; my paths; your laws; my daughter-in-law; '"their (m.) booths. My praise (art) thou. Behold, the fear of Jahweh, it (/".) (is) wisdom. '^Good(is) the law of Jahweh. — j| C. Perf. Qal (§54). 'Fallen are the heroes. They have buried their (m.) dead. Jahweh heard the voice of Hagar. Judah conquered Gaza and its (Hebr. /.) border. ^I have hearkened unto (a) your voice. They took their horses and their asses and went out of the land of Egypt. Ye have not kept the law of Jahweh. Thou (/.) hast not buried thy dead. I have taken pleasure in thy law. '°Ye have killed our witnesses. ''Thou, (0) Jahweh, hast preserved my life. 6. Masculines with cliangeable Vowel in the Penult §23 (G 93 IV a. D 18). A. 'My princes; the belly of the serpent; our prophets; my lord; *our lord; our lords; her place; your places; his harvest; '"the (he-) asses of Abraham and his she-asses; his saints; our harvest; from our sin; from his right-hand and from his left; '^the sins of the Amorite. — |1 B. 'Your prophets (are) lying prophets. Where (are) thy (/.) prophets? Thy (/.) tongue (is) a lying tongue. Jahweh is near unto his saints. ^Maaasse slew the prophets of Jahweh. ®He has gone out from his place. CERESTOMATHIA V. 71* 7. Masculines with changeable Vowel in last Syllable § 24 (G 93 Ilia. h. D 18. 30). ^Thy judgments; my food; their {m.) palaces; our messenger; ^your {m.) number; my stars; his weight; your {m.) judgments; his palaces. — |1 '"Behold, Hagar (is) in thy (/".) hand. Great (is) the number of the stars of heaven. For Gibeon is a great city, greater than (§826) Ai. Thy (/.) memory (is) dead. My rock and my redeemer (is) Jahweh. '^ Behold, (here is) the fire and the wood for {gen.) the burnt-offering; but (l) where (is) the ox? *' The voice (is) the voice of Jacob; but (l) the hands (are) the hands of Esau. These (§16a) (are) the names of David's heroes. '^ Great in {st. c.) might (is) Jahweh. — || B. 'God created (§86e) the sun and the moon and the stars. The king sent his messengers but (n) they did not find the prophet. The glory of Jahweh hath filled this house. David did not stretch forth his hand against (3) Saul, the anointed of Jahweh. ^Our enemies have fled. Ye have pursued your enemies. Your hands are full of (ace. § 83 b) blood. They shed their blood like water. Jahweh hath given Israel into the hand of his enemies. '"He made an altar of (gen.) brass. Jehu burnt the sanctuaries of Baal with (a with Article §17/'l) fire. '^The enemies' messengers have drawn near. 72* CHRESTOMATHIA V. 8. Masculines with two changeable Vowels § 25 (G93II«— e. D18). A. 'The court of the tabernacle; her word; my beard; his son-in-law; ^thy booty (p-); your (/".) hire; in thy courts; the elders of the people; our hire; "*your flesh; Jacob's thigh. — || *^This (is) David's booty. Jahweh (is) far from the wicked. A reproach (are) we to our neighbours. '^Pleasant (are) the words of the prophet. Thy (/".) redeemer, the Lord of Hosts (is) his name (§86ea). Better (is he that is) longsuffering than a hero. '^Dry (faded, are) all the trees of this wood. — || B. 'The wisdom of his wise men has come to nought. Moses did according to (3) the word of Jahweh. The cloud of Jahweh descended on the tabernacle. His heart was not perfect with (uy) Jahweh his God, like the heart of David. ^Thus said Moses: I (am) slow of speech and of a slow tongue (render: heavy of mouth (gen.) and heavy of tongue). Our God hath no (sib) pleasure in the wicked. (There) has not fallen to the ground (§20ca) one word of the words of Jahweh. ^Thou hast not remembered their lies. 9. Masculines of one Syllable with the final Con- sonant doubled §26 (G93 1l,m,n. D43). A. 'Their (m.) oppressors; in his shadow; your mothers; your end; *our heart; your teeth; the times; the shadow of the cloud. His teeth (are) the teeth of a lion. '"Jahv/eh CHRESTOMATHIA V. 73* is my strength and my shield. Sinners (are) ye all. A word in (a) its season, how good (it is)! '^ Those mountains (are) smaller than Lebanon. — |1 B. Qal. ^Jahweh hath chosen (with 3) the people of Israel out of all peoples. The oppressors o£ Jerusalem have fled. Thou hast clothed-thyself (with) strength and glory. Ye have buried your mother. ^ Jahweh hath sent forth his sharp arrows (Hebr. his arrows the sharp ones). Sell your camels. Jahweh hath poured out his fierce anger upon Egypt. The whole people heard the words of the king. They will burn every house. '" The number of their oppressors will be great. 10. Masculine Segholate Forms from strong Stems § 28 (G 93 I a—f. D 29. 35 ff.). I. A. ^My way; your ways; thy kings; your (»i.) dogs; ^my dog; our soul; your (/".) souls; the children of the Hebrews; his horn; ^"our door; the horns of the ox; your swords; thy (/.) stone; thy(/.) grave; ^^his knees. — || '^Your servants (are) we. His horns (are) the horns of a wild-ox. Jahweh (is) our righteousness. Kighteous (is) Jahweh in all his ways. ^"Better (is) his favour than (82 &) life. The heavens (are) the throne of Jahweh and the earth is his footstool (render: the stool of his feet). ^^Thy word (is) a lamp unto (b) my feet. — || B. (Niph., Pi., Pu.) 'The bow is broken. Seek ye the way to {genet. § 21/") the city. Shut thy door. Thy horn is full 74* CHRESTOMATHIA V. of {ace. §83&) oil. ^I will remember thy favour. He did not give of his bread to the poor. We have sought our dog. Broken is my heart within me (see voca- bulary). He walked in the way of the kings of Israel. '"Jahweh will break-in-pieces (Pi.) the cedars of Lebanon. My vows will I pay to Jahweh. '^ Jahweh will keep the feet of the godly. II. 'His seed; their (m.) wounds; your trans- gression; thy (/. ^.) boys; ^your boys; his master; 'my anger. III. 'His staff; my staves; the names of the tribes of Israel; thy portion. || ^In the law of Jahweh (is) my delight. My help (is) in the name of Jahweh. 'Jahweh (is) our portion. IV. A. 'Our ransom; our ear; our ears; thy spear; ^her work; their works; thy threshing-floor; his holiness; ^your tent. — || B. 'Ye have broken our spears. We have broken your spears. They have slept in their tents. *I will speak these words in their ears. 11. Masculine Segholate Forms from i"y and l"3> § 29 (G 93 I g. h. i. D 41). 'Thine (/.) eye ; her eyes; my wine; your wine; ^the rams of Bashan; our venison. 'He stood in their midst. 12. Masculine Segholate Forms from n"b § 30 (G 93 1 A". D 45). 'Our captives; his affliction. Better is my fruit than (82 &) silver and [than] gold. CHEESTOMATHIA V. 13. Nouns with two full Vowels from n"ii § 31 (G 93 IV b. II /•. Ill c. D 45). A. ^Our afflicted ones; the innocent (pi.) among (genet.) my people; a false (SITID ^ew.) vision; our deeds: ^ his work (deed) ; David's seers; his face; ®our faces. — |1 ^Greater (are) my works than (82 &) your works. ^"Jahweh (is) my shepherd. Where (are) my shepherds andthy shepherds ? '^Jahweh, the work of thy hands (are) we all. — || B. ^ David sought the face of Jahweh. Joshua fell upon his face before the ark of Jahweh. His field will be sold. Jahweh will remember the afflicted of his people. ^Shed not (bx § 41, 3) innocent blood. 14. Femiiiines with one changeable Vowel § 33 (G 95 II c. D 17. 18. 29). A. 'My year; the years of the famine; thy (/.) counsel; your counsel; 'your abomination; your kingdoms; ^his thoughts. — || B. 'The counsel of the elders of Israel has come to nought. 15. Feniinines with two changeable Vowels § 34 (G 95 II a. b. D 18). A. 'My vengeance; your venge- ance; our myriads; your (/.) cry; Hhy (/.) blessing; the father's bl essing ; the blessings of Jahweh ; the sighs of the afflicted; your sighs; '"our cry; "your cry. — II B. 'Jahweh heard the sighs of the afflicted of his people. The Egyptians sold all their land to Pharaoh. 76* CHEESTOMATHIA V. 16. Feminines of Seg^holate Forms from strong Stems § 35 (G 95 I a. b. c. D 17. 18). A. ^Your queen; the garments of the poor; our garments; thy maiden; *the maidens of the city; my maid; my maids; thy joy; joys; '"their (to.) meal-offering; the meal-offer- ings; your (/.) fruit; her reproach; '*his foreskin. — || B. 'God hath no pleasure in your burnt-offerings and in your meal-offerings. They will mourn upon their ruins. 17. Feminine Segliolale Forms § 36 (G 95 III. D 29). ' My cloak ; the land of our birth ; their (m.) wages ; the queens' signet-rings; ^thy (/.) sin; ^her or- nament. 18. Feminines in uth and itli § 37. A. 'Your captivity; the Hebrew virgins (adj. after siidst.). Thy kingdom (is) an everlasting kingdom. — || B. ' Jahweh knew the imaginations of thy heart. Keep the com- mandments of Jahweh and his testimonies. 19. Nouns of peculiar Formation § 38 (G 96. D page 198). I. 'Your father; his fathers; thy (/.) brother ; their (fn.) brother ; ^ thy (/.) brothers ; the sister of Moses; thy (/".) sister; my husband; your men; "'my men (p.); her maid; your maid; thy (/.) maids; your house; '^his houses; thy (/.) son; your son; his daughter; my daughters; ^"his sons; ^' our daughter. CUEESTOMATHIA V. 77* IT. 'My day; your day; my days; in the days of Joshua; ^ his vessels; your vessels; his waters; his heavens; since ()12) the days of Moses; 'Hheir (m.) city; their cities; our head; your heads; thy mouth; '^our mouth. Behold, to Jahweh thy God (belong) heaven (tv. art.) and the heaven of heavens. Better (is) one day in the house of Jahweh than (826) many days in the palaces of the wicked. '*I (am) not better than my fathers. 20. Numerals § 39 (G 97. 98. 120. D 48). '5 kings; 5 cubits; her 5 maidens; the 5 (c.) kings; '^the 5 (abs.) righteous; 10 boys; 7 oxen; 7 cows; 7 (c.) days; '"the 7 (c.) days; his 7 (c.) sons; 5 trees; 9 cubits; 9 months; '^8 years; 8 sons; 8 (c.) days; 10 times. || 17 years; ^''I2pri/ices; 19 men; 13 oxen; his 11 children; 15 years; ^^ISyears; lishekels. || 25 years; 87 years; 25 (20 + 5) cubits; ^•'75 years (70yrs.+ 5 yrs.). || 500; 700; '^ 207 years (7 yrs. + 200 yrs.). ^^In the 17th year of (b) Jehoshaphat; on the 27th (20 + 7 or 7 + 20) of (!:) the month; on the 17th day of (b) the month. In the 5th year of (b) Joram; in the 5th year of (b)kingRehoboam;^^in the 10th month. 21. Particles with suffixes §§40.43. 44. 45 (G 100. 103. D 49). A. 'With me (3), between them (2); like her; upon thee (/".); ^behind thee; instead of her; instead of them (3); to them; them (2) ; '"round about 78* CBRESTOMATHIA V. you; to her; unto me; from me; '*from you. — || '^The Lord of Hosts (is) with us. I (am) a stranger among you. Ye (are) witnesses against yourselves (a w. 2 pi. suff.). The spirit of Jahweh (is) upon him. ^^Who (is) wise as thou? — || B. 'Jahweh hath not dealt with us according to (3) our sins. Jahweh hath given this land to you and to your sons after you. According to your ways will I judge you. Cast from (byia) you all your transgressions. '"'Jahweh will judge between me and [between] you. I will pour out my fierce anger upon you. Solomon will be king in my stead. He pursued after them. While he yet talked {part.) with them, behold (Hebr. and behold c. part.) the messenger came down to him. '"She said unto me: Where is Jahweh, thy (/".) God? Behold, they are coming out {part.) to you. They stood the whole day before me. Jahweh your God, who goeth {part.) before you, he will fight for (b) you. They have fled before thee. '° We fled before you. He destroyed them from off (}'S'a)- the face of the earth. He has parted from me. Your oppressors will I remove (far) from you. Abraham bought the cave from (iiS)?) Ephron. ^•^ Joseph took Simeon from them. ^'Jahweh took Amos from ('I'irilS'a) the flock. 22. Negative Particles § 41 (G 152). 'Thou shalt not (sb c. impf.) steal. Do not steal. Destroy not. 0HRE8T0MATHIA T. 79* Remember not the days of your affliction. ^Gather (together) your heroes that your city be not captured. Pray to Jahweh, that sin may not have dominion over you. (There is) no God beside thee. (There is) no peace, Jahweh hath said, for the wicked. We are seek- ing {part) water, but (1) there is none. ^^ If there is an answer, speak ; but (l) if not, hearken unto me. They do not know {part.) what is due to (t^B©)? with gen.) the God of the land. Thus said Pharaoh: I will not give {part.) you straw. If thou savest not thy soul this night (§17«), to-morrow thou (art) a dead man (render: son of death). '^Ye do not keep {part.) my commandments, 23. Interrogative Particles § 42 (G 100. 153. D 49). *What aileth thee (Hebr. what to thee), Hagar? Is {tt}) Jahweh in our midst or not? (Are) thy days as the days of a (frail) man (iBiDSJ), or thy years as the days of (strong) man (laa) ? (Art) thou better than Balak? ^Spy out the people, whether they (be) strong or weak, whether they (be) few or many. ^Spy out the land, whether there are trees {sg.) in it or not. 24. Perfect Qal § 54 (G 44. D 20. .22). ^She has reigned; ye have reigned; thou (/.) hast watched; they have watched; ^we have sold; I remembered; ye (/.) have remembered; ye lay down; she has shut (j9.);."*we have followed. — '^She is heavy {p.)\ ye 80* CHBESTOMATHIA V. have drawn near; they have drawn near; thou art old; ^^thou (/".) wert able; thou (m.) wert small; ''we have become great. 25. Infinitive and Imperative Qal §§ 55. 56 (G 45. 46. D 21. 22. 23). 'To remember; to bury; in judging; from burying; ^to count. — Break (s.); break (pl.f.); judge ye; bury (/".); "'pray remember. — || ''Remember the mercies of Jahweh. Put on your (/".) garments. Gather stones. They have gone to gather in the field. '^The trees said to the olive: Be thou, we pray, king over us. 26. Imperfect and Participle Qal §§ 57. 58 (G 47. 50. D 21. 22. 23). 'I shall judge; we shall judge; they (/.) will steal; thou (/".) wilt watch; ^she will sell; they (/.) will sell; thou wilt reign; they will pour out; I shall shut; '°ye will remember; ye will watch (p.); thou wilt remember (p.). — We will lie down; thou shalt draw near; '^they shall draw near (p.); they (/■.) shall clothe themselves; we will lie down (p.). — Watching; watching (/.); ^"burying (/.); shut; shut (/.); buried (/.); ^*watched (/".). — ^^ Jerusalem (/".) will no longer remember the days of her affliction. Eemember not the sins of my youth. To Jahweh your God must (impf.) ye cleave (p.). Thou shalt cleave to thy husband. We will make a covenant. ^"I will CHRESTOMATHIA V. 81* make a covenant with ("fis) thee. I will gather all Israel unto (bs) my Lord. ^^Jahweh shall reign for ever. 27. Niph'al [Niqtal] § 59 (G 51. D 25). A. ^They have taken heed; ye have been sold; she has been sold (p.); thou (/.) hast taken heed; ^I hid myself; Ye have gone to law; they have been burned; I have gone to law with (TS) you. — To take heed; '"(those who were) sold; (those (/.) who were) burnt. — Hide yourselves; take heed (/. s.). — We will hide ourselves; thou (/.) wilt hide thyself; "they (/.) will be burnt; ye will be sold (p.); ye (/".) will be sold; I shall take heed; '^I will take heed. — || B, 'Behold, for (a) your sins were ye sold. The wicked will be cut off from the midst of (Ijintt) the land. The city was captured. Thy (/.) dead shall not be buried. *Thy kingdom shall be destroyed. ^I will go to law with ("nx) you before Jahweh. 28. Piel, Pu'al [Qittel Quttal] § 60 (G 52. D 26). A. 'Thou hast sanctified; they have sanctified; ye (/".) have spoken; she has spoken (p.). — 'To seek; teach (pi. m.) ; teach (s.f.p.); speak (pi. /.). — Ye will teach; '"thou (/".) wilt teach; ye (/.) will teach; we will teach; teachers; the seekers. — '^She was stolen. They were buried; thou (/.) wast born; they will be gathered; ye (/".) will be buried. ^"Thou (/.) wilt 82* CHRESTOMATHIA V. lie. — t! B. ^The heavens recount (part.) the glory of God. Ye have sanctified the Sabbath-day. They sought the face of Jahweh. Honour thy father and thy mother (p.). ^ Those that honour me (part.), I will honour. I will seek my father's asses. She will gather in the field. Ye should not lie to your king. Moses sanctified the people. '''Jahweh will teach the humble His way. Recount to me, I pray you (S5), the former mercies of Jahweh (Hebr.: the mercies of J., the former). I will teach transgressors thy ways. I will praise thy name. '*They (/".) will praise the name of Jahweh. 29. Hiph'il, Hoph'al [Hiqtil, Hoqtal] § 61 (G 53. D 27). A. ■'I have separated; we have separated; they have destroyed; thou hast destroyed; ^she has cast; thou (/.) hast cast; ye have cast. — To cast; separate; '"separate (pi. /.); cast (pi). — I will cast; we will corrupt; let him separate; '"they (/.) will separate; thou (/".) wilt corrupt; Ye will cast. — Casting; casting (/■.). — ^°'Ye have been cast; ^Hhou (/".) wilt be cast. — jl B. 'Thou hast hid thy face from (]u) the wicked. How long wilt thou hide thy face ? Hide not thy face from thy people. Thou hast not attended to (b) my commandments. ^Attend to the word of my mouth. Thou hast cast my word behind thee. They each (©itj!) cast away his staff. Cast thy sorrow upon CHRESTOMATHIA V. 83* Jahweh. ^Jahweh will separate between the righteous and [between] the wicked. 30. Hithpael [Hithqattel] § 62 (G 54. D 27). ^I have walked; ye have walked; they have walked (p.) ; we hid ourselves; ^thou hast taken heed. — To hide one's self; they that hide themselves (part.); they that walk. — They will walk; '"Ye will take heed; we will hide ourselves. || ^^Ye prayed unto me, but (1) I did not hearken to your cry. 31. Waw Consecntivum § 64 (G 49. D 60) ^And they pursued their enemies and captured the city and burnt it with (a; article § 17/1) fire. ^ And Abraham prayed to God. Thou wilt capture the city and burn it with fire. And they buried him in the city of David, and his son reigned in his stead. ^I will remember my word and will send my messenger before (iDBb) thee. We will rise early in the morning and sell Joseph. Verily (§ 63 d) ye ought to keep (impf.) the commandments of Jahweh and teach them (to) your children. Write these words on the two tables and teach them (unto) the children of Israel. Get thee up early in the morning, and take thy stand before Pharaoh and (then) thou shalt say to him: Let the people of Jahweh go. ^''Then Moses hid his face; for he was afraid. Then Pharaoh hardened (made heavy) his heart. '^Behold, I (§ 40 d) will rain (part.) bread 84* CHRESTOMATHIA V. for you from heaven, and (1 cons.) the people shall go out and shall gather a day's portion every day (Hebr. the word of a day in its day). 32. Relative Clauses § 87 (G 123. 155). ^ David and the men that (were) with him fled before Saul. They put to death all the women that (were) in the city. The spies told the woman all that Jahweh had done {perf.) to Pharaoh. The land which I am giving {part.) you (is) like the garden of Eden. 'The word which thou hast spoken (is) good. I will destroy all flesh, in which (is) the breath of life. The place, where he had pitched his tent. Holy (is) the place whereon thou standest {part.). ^They have gone to ("bs) the land, from which (where) they went out. 33. Guttural Verbs § 65 (G 63 — 65. D 34. 36. 37). A. I. ^Ye have driven out; drive ye out; they (/.) will drive out; and he drove out; ^thou wilt bless; they will be put to death; thou (/.) wilt be forsaken; we shall be forsaken; to be forsaken. — ^'•Ye have made haste; he will make haste; thou hast been comforted; '^we shall be cdmforted. II. 'Fleeing; to hear; to cause to swear; thou wilt j cause to hear, ij 'send; flee {pi. f-)\ we shall hear; I they (/".) will hear; and she opened; "'thou {f.) wilt sow (p.); he will be heard; and we swore. || They will covet; thou wilt spare; ''I shall cross over; we shall OHKESTOMATHIA V. 85* cross over; we will cross over; thou (/".) wilt serve; they will serve; ^"they (/.) will serve; we shall love; thou wilt be wise; I have brought over; ^^and thou wilt ca,use to serve. III. 'Ye (/.) have served; to serve; washers; thou (/.) wilt wash; ^she has washed; thou (/.) wilt be proved; and they were amazed; and they placed ; and ye caused to serve ; "^ I shall place ; we will send over. || Wash {sg. f.); bless {sg. /.); and they blest; ''she has blest ; a sower (/".) ; ''thou (/■.) hast taken. B. 'Thou wilt shave thy head. He refused to let the people go. Jahweh hath redeemed Jacob and will glorifyhimself in Israel. They have destroyed my vine- yard. ' He went up to destroy the city. Choose ye this (Article §17a) day whom (§83e) ye will serve. Then (T cons.) the people made haste {pi. § 86 c a) and crossed the Jordan. Make haste {sg. /.), (and) slay the calf. Thou shalt not covet thy neighbour's house. '"Ye have not coveted your neighbours' wives. Thou (/".) hast not forgotten the words of thy prophets. Even (D3) a fool, if {part) he keep silence, is esteemed {impf.) %il d) a wise man. Thy land thou hast destroyed, thy people thou hast put to death. We were esteemed as (3) the cattle (in the stalls). '^ Ye have devised evil against (b?) me. They will devise evil against me. I will spare you, for ye did spare me. Comfort ye, 17** 86* CHKESTOMATHIA V. comfort ye my people. Ye forsook Jahweh; therefore (l cotis.) did he forsake you. ^"Jahweh (is) my shepherd; I shall not want. 34. Verbs s"b §66(G68. D35). ' Thou wilt speak; then I spoke; thou (/.) wilt eat; they will eat (p.); ^I shall eat; then ye did eat; and ye ate. Then spake Jahweh to (b) the prophet, saying: Because this people has refused (render: has not been willing) to hearken to my voice, I will send {Pi.) against (a) them the (wild) beast of the field, and the lions shall tear and devour your flocks {sg.) and your herds {sg.) ^The she-asses will perish in the wilderness. 35. Verbs fs § 67 (G 66. D 33). A. ^Thou (/.) wilt fall; they have fallen ; and they (/.) fell; they told; ^and I told; to let fall; ye have saved; and she saved; he will be saved; '"he shall look; one who looks {part.); we shall plant; they will touch; thou (/.) wilt remove (§6/3). '^And ye have taken; they will take; take thou (/.); then thou (/.) didst take; we will take. | ^"Ye (/.) have given; thou (/".) wilt give; then she gave; we will give {p.)\ ^*thy giving {inf.). — II B. 'And (^ cons.) he sent his servant to take a wife for Isaac. I will give thy flesh to the birds of heaven. I have given the land into his hand. The word of Jahweh will not fall to the ground (§20ca). ^Tell me, I pray thee (xp), the words of the OHRESTOMATHIA T. 87* seer. Give now (n) thy heart to the God of thy fathers. Take off thy shoes from (off) thy feet; for ' this place (is) holy. 36. Verbs ^"^t § 68 (G 69. D 39). A. 'She will be born; we shall be rebuked; rebuke (sg. /".) | They have begotten; ^then they begat; ye were brought down; thou wilt be brought down. | Thou wilt sleep; they will sleep; '"thou (/.) wilt be weary. | She will go down; they will dwell (p.); know thou; thou (/.) hast known; '-'ye will know (/?.); and ye knew; thou (/■.) wilt go (p.); '4hey that go (part.).— \\ B. 'And (then) the kings took counsel. With ("ins) those that take counsel (is) wisdom. Let my soul be precious in thine eyes! After these things he took a wife and (§ 64) begat sons and daughters. ^Helieard the sound (voice) of the rain from afar; and he brought down his flock from the mountain in haste (§84e). Let thy servant, I pray thee, know these things. 'Know ye that I (am) God. 37. Verbs ■'"iB § 69 (G 70. D 39). 'She will be good; thou hast done well; we shall do well; they will suck (p.); ^thou (/.) hast given suck; she will give suck; she was dry (p.); they will be dry; they have dried (trans.). — || '"The grass in the field has become dry. And (then) the king's hand dried up. And all their herbage will I dry up. Moses heard the 88* CHRESTOMATHIA v. word of Aaron, and (§64) it was good in his eyes. "If thou wilt hearken to my voice, then (l cows.) will Jahweh do thee good and thou wilt remember thy handmaid. 38. Verbs 2"iS § 70 (G 71. D 39). ^I have kindled a fire in the houses of the gods of Egypt. And (then) they set the city on (a, Article §17/1) fire. Her gates were set on fire. And Jahweh formed out of the ground every beast of the field. ^ Every beast of the field was formed out of the ground. Take your stand, that (§46d, e) I may plead with you. Jahweh cleft the sea and (§64) set the waters like a (Art.) wall. Ye stand (render: are set) to-day before Jahweh your God. I will pour out my spirit upon thy seed. '''And he poured the oil upon his head. 39. Verbs V';s> § 71 (G 72. D 40). A. ^We have lifted up; thou wilt fly; flying; thou hast fled; ^she has returned; ye have returned; return {pi); we will return; to return; ■"'let him return; and (l cons.) he returned; thou wilt be circumcised; ye have circum- cised; we will circumcise; '^she is dead; ye are dead; thou (/".) wilt kill; and they killed; they were killed; ^"they will be killed {p.); thou hast lifted up; they (/".) will die; then was I exalted (high); and I lifted up; ^^ye have scattered. — !| B. 'In thee did our fathers trust and they were not put to shame. Then I knew that I should not be put to shame. Get thee 0HRESTO.MATH1A V. 89* {Dat. com. — b w. suff.) up. Return ye {Dat. com.) to your tents. *Be thou exalted, (0) Jahweh, through thy might! And now will my head be exalted above mine enemies. Righteousness exalteth {Polel impf.) a nation. I lifted up my voice. Then Moses lifted up his hand. ^"Jahweh my God, let, I pray thee, the soul of this boy return within him (isnp-by)! Lift up thy voice like a (Art.) trumpet. Mine eyes were enlightened (shone). Arise (/.), shine; for thy light is come. Lightnings lighted up the sea. '^Make, now (§52c), thy face to shine upon thy servant. And he rested [on] the seventh day. ^^They refused to return. 40. Verbs i":> § 72 (G 73. D 40). 'Ye will set; set thou (/■.); thou wilt lodge; and we lodged; °ye have beenglad; hewill be glad. — Let my heart rejoice. And. the daughters of Judah rejoiced. Be ye glad and rejoice; for behold I {suff.) am about to create {part. §472^) Jerusalem and her people for joy, and (l cons.) I will rejoice over (a) Jerusalem and be glad in my people. '"Then David perceived that the child was dead. " Get understanding (understand), and there- after (nns) we will talk. 41. Verbs y"y § 73 (G 67. D 42). A. 'We have praised; and he praised; and thou (/.) didstpraise; they have spoiled their spoilers ; ^he rolled the stone ; thou wilt 90* OHBESTOMATHIA V. curse; ye will spoil; he will be merciful and he was merciful. || ^"Ye were merciful; thou hast done wickedly. — |1 B. 'In Jahweh will my soul glory. Let not (the §175-2) wise man glory in his wisdom, and let not (the) rich man glory in his riches. They will glory in the Holy (One) of Israel. I will praise Jahweh while I live (render : in my life). ^And they praised her beauty. And Joshua said: Compass (go round) the city; and they compassed the city. Swifter (lighter) than eagles (Art. § 17/) are his horses. I am despised (light) in thine eyes. Ended are the words of Job. '"They wandered in the wilderness, till (c. inf!) the whole generation was consumed. Men (co//..- sg. c. Art.) began to be numerous. Numerous are (oxytone) our trans- gressions. Hushai has gone to bring to nought the counsel of Ahithophel. And (1 cons.) God brought their counsel to nought. '^I will not break my cove- nant with you. They have broken thy law. Be not (bi?) dismayed; for Jahweh thy God (is) with thee. Let my pursuers be put to shame, but let not me be put to shame (bs c. cohort.) ; let them be dismayed, but let not me be dismayed. And (1 cons.) this word was evil in the eyes of Saul. ^^ And Moses said: Lord, why (§45e6) hast thou done evil to this people? Since (TK'SD) I went unto Pharaoh, to speak in thy name, he hath done evil to this people. They did CHRESTOMATHIA V. 91^ evil more than (§82&P) their fathers. My brethren, do not wickedly. Depart from me, ye evil-doers (part. V). And (1 cons.) they were in distress. ^^Hide not thy face from thy servant; for I am in distress; make haste to hearken (Hebr. : make haste, hearken §84/) unto my voice. 42. Verbs n"!: § 74 (G 75. D 44. 45). A. I. 'He will see; he will show; thou wilt finish; we shall be seen; 'they (/.) will build; ye (/".) will finish; give ye Cf.) to drink; thou wilt answer; I shall answer. '"Build thou; I was finished; thou wert built; we were built; we have built; '^ye (/.) have answered; '^ye have watered. — || II. 'He has seen; he was seen; to build; to go up; ^to finish; to weep; she wept; she has finished; ^she has watered. — || III. 'They have wept; weep thou (/■.); weep ye; they finished; ^give thou (/".) to drink; thou (/.) wilt finish; ye will finish; ye will build; they were built; '"answer ye; bring ye up; '^they will be seen. — || IV. 'And she drank; and he wept; and thou didst despise; and she saw; ^and he saw; do not (bs §41,3) answer (sg); and he finished; and she watered the camels; and she ordered; '"let him do; we will hear and answer; thou didst fall down; and she fell down; and they fell down; 'Hhou (/".) wilt fall down: "^one who falls down (part.)-— il B. 'Arise, go up to Ai (ace. p.); see, 92* CHRESTOMATHIA V. I have given into thy hand the king of Ai and his people. See (/.), thy son (is) alive. Ye have done according to all that Moses commanded you. All they will be glad, that {part. st. c. §21^) take refuge in thee. ^What seest {part.) thou? See, a little cloud, like a man's hand (C|3), is coming up {part.) from the sea. What are ye doing {part.)? We are building . {part.) the wall. The city (is) large and the people (are) few (small sg.) in the midst of it, and there are no (I'^K § 41, 2) built houses. ^''And David said: 1 am come to buy the threshing-floor from (D?a) thee, to build an altar to Jahweh. Thou wilt build a house but thou wilt not dwell in it. They {pron.) will build, but I will pull down. The city has been built. The cities of Judah will be built. ^^She was in the field, till (ly c. inf.) the harvest was finished. We have been consumed by thine anger. The eyes of the wicked will fail (render: be consumed). I have con- sumed my strength. In the third month they began, and by (3) the seventh month they had finished. ^"She finished watering (§846. d) the camels. And he finished his business. Ye shall do according to the word of Jahweh; see, I have commanded you. And Moses commanded the people saying: keep the whole commandment which I give unto you (render: wh. I command you, c. 2 ace.) this (art. §17 a) day. CHEESTOIIATHIA V. 93* Command {sg. apoc.) the children of Israel, that (■)) they cast out, every leper from the camp. ^^ Command ye the people, saying: Get up early in the morning and (l cons.) cross over the river. Command {sg.) the priests to (l) come up out of the Jordan. And Joshua commanded the priests, saying: Come up out of the Jordan. Let us arise and go up to {ace.) Beth-El. ^''Do {pi.) not ("bs) offer unto me burnt-offerings. 43. Verbs »"b § 75 (G74. D 38). ^He has sinned; she will sin; he was created; thou hast sinned; ^ye have sinned; ye have defiled; thou hast defiled thy- self; we have filled. — || And Jahweh said : I will blot out (§74f) man {coll., rv. art.), whom I have created from off (^Ta) the face of the ground. ^"In the place where (§ 87 A) thou (/".) wert created will I judge thee. My soul has sought but I have not found. Ye have not found my riddle. I shall not find among (3) you a single wise man. Ye will seek but ye will not find. '^I have been found {Ni.) of (b) you. In that day, the sins (nxtsn) of Judah shall not be found; for I will forgive them. Jacob have I loved, but Esau have I hated. Thou shalt not (sb c. impf.) hate thy brother. '^I hate {impf. §47c. d.) them that hate thee, (0) Jahweh (Hebr. : thy haters — part. Pi.). 44. Doubly and trebly weak Verbs § 76 (G 76). A. ^He will assuredly {63 d) become (followed by b) 94* OHRESTOMATHIA V. a great nation. And (1 cons.) there was again war between David and [between] the Philistines. And he drank of the wine and lived. Thou hast stretched forth thy hand. 'They have perverted judgment. Do not ye pervert judgment. Then they smote the Philistines. She proved Solomon by riddles. The kings will not leave the wicked unpunished. '"I have prophesied, but ("i) ye have not inclined your heart unto Jahweh. And (then) they lifted up their eyes. And she lifted up her voice again (§84&). We will praise the name of Jahweh. Praise ye Jahweh (b); for (he is) kind. ''They confessed. He instructed. They will instruct. And ("i cons.) I brought you to (-bx) the land of Canaan. Go thou unto ("bs) Pharaoh. ^''As I was with Moses, (so) will I be with thee. Bring forth (/".) the men that came (part.) unto ("bs) thee, who are come to (b) thy house. Thee hath Jahweh, thy God, chosen, to be to him [forb] apeculiar people. I feared the people, and ("i cons.) hearkened to their voice. This (is) the woman and this her son, whom Elisha brought to life. ^^ Stretch forth thy hand. I have brought you forth out of Egypt with a strong hand and with an outstretched arm. Then Moses stretched forth his hand. Ye have not inclined your ear. Incline thine ear and hear. ^^ And they perverted the judgment of the orphans. Wherefore, then (nt § 'i:2g), CHEESTOMATHIA V. 95* did we go out of Egypt? And (1 cons.) Jephthah came to his house, and behold his daughter went forth (part.) to meet him. And (then) Moses lifted up his rod, and smote the rock twice (du.) ; and there came forth much water and the congregation drank. ^''Thou shalt not (impf.) take (sto5) the name of Jahweh in vain (Hebr.: for falsehood); for Jahweh will not let him go unpunished that taketh his name in vain. 45. For Repetition. 'Declare unto us what shall happen (f. pL, §18a), that (§46rf.e.) we may know that ye (are) gods. Build houses and dwell (therein), and plant gardens and eat the fruit thereof (suff.) ; take (to yourselves) wives andbeget sons and daughters, and take wives for your sons, and give your daughters to husbands, that (§ 46) they may bear sons and daughters; and there do ye increase (imper.). Call ye with (3) a loud voice; perhaps he is asleep (part.) and will wake up. ''He will say to those that (are) in darkness: go forth. 46. Comparison § 82 (G 119. D 47). 'Better (were it) for us to serve Egypt than to die in the wilder- ness. I have understanding (see Vocab.) above (more than §826^) all my teachers. ^Behold, the hand of Jahweh is not too short for him (cf. §82&a) to save, nor (and not) is his ear too heavy for him to hear. 96* OHEESTOMATHIA V. 47. Verbs with the Accusative § 83 (G 138. 139). ^ Their houses are full of swords and spears. They have filled (Qal) the land with violence. He has filled (Pi.) them with wisdom. He that tills (part.) his land will be satisfied with bread. 'Her poor will I satisfy with bread. She clothed Jacob with the clothes of Esau. I will serve Jahweh with all my heart. I shall answer him. ^Answer (sff.) a fool according to his folly. 48. Subject and Predicate § 86 (G 146. 147). 'The people answered him not a word. The people went up out of the Jordan. Thy (/.) oppressors shall be taken captive, and (^ cons.) all flesh shall know that I am Jahweh thy redeemer. ""There died Saul and his son Jonathan. 49. Conditional Sentences § 88 (G 155, 2). ^And he said unto her: if thou wilt go with me, then (1 cons.) I will go ; but (^) if thou wilt not go, I will not go. If thou wilt indeed (§63io 71. city 11? /■. 38. cleave Spa 65 1, III ; c. to 3 p?'n(e). cloak ni^N 36. clothe one's self UJaV, c. some one V, S3f. cloud IJS iw. 25; 3S f. (Ex. 42). come Sia 76 A; k:.. back iiiaj 71; c. down "ii; 68/".; c. forth, out NS^ 765'; u. up. t^bS. comfort ans III, 67 ; PasV. IV. command njS 74, ace. j>e»-s. command, commandment mSa 22. compass (circumire, circumdare) 330 73. congregation !T1S 28 a. consume (one's strength &o.) nfes 74. be consumed n^3 74. T ■ _ T T corrupt n^niuri. counsel JlSS 33; take c. y'S'^ U68d. count ISO. court lUrj 25d. covenant ri'^ia, make a o.'3 ni3. covet loH ace. cow rrns 22. create KIB 75. cross, 0. over 133) 65. cubit nax. cup 013. curse bfep, 11X 73. out off niisn; pass. ni32. Daniel bx*??!. darkness tlfflH 28. daughter na 38. daughter-in-law 11^3. David n.X day di-i 38. dead na. death Wa 29 c.; put to d. MaV, 71 i. u; ain. declare 153 T,"67. deed ntoa 31, iSQ 28. defile, V. pollute, delight I'Sn 28; take del. in a I'sn 65^. deliver afea; bsj T, 67. depart 110 71a3. despise Inta 74; be despised Vp (bVp) 73' destroy (break in pieces) 131^ I, III; (of a city, country &c.) rm 656 ; (of persons) niTOn, liaiari; d. utterly (=devoveo) diirin 65^. devise aian. devour ^3J< 66a. die rea 7li.M. dismayed, be Hh (nnn) 73/". 0. distress, be in : impers. IS (IIS) 730. Folld. by h w. suff. divide binsn. do nias 74. dog 3V3 28. dominion, have buja, over a. door rt'^ 28. ENGLISH-HEBREW VOCABULAEY. 103* drink nnia 74, 77; give to d. npB v' 74, 77. drive out UJ'ns 656. 64^. dry Ilia; 25/; be, become d. lUa;; 69a; to dry up, dry (trans.)Y. dry land nsin, naiai. •^ T T it' T T- due, (what is d. to one) aSttJa (Ex. 22). dust 1SS 25. dwell auj|i 68/'. each (adj.) Vs 26; (pron. opp. to otter) B^X. ear ■,tX /. 28. early, v. rise, earth ^nti f. 28, Art. 17d. eat bsx 66a. Eden ')'li'. Edom dinx. Egypt Ci'^nsa. Egyptian i^sa, pi. O'l'iSa. elder l|5t 25.' Elijah iin»l?J<. Elishah SlB-iis. end yp, 26. enemy S'l^ix 2id. enlightened, be: v. shine. Esau lias. T" esteem (cestimare) aaJri. etei-nity D^is 24. ever, for e. D^iS^. everlasting: rend«r by genetive of dbiS; an e. king dViS Tl^a. every bs 26. evil (subst.) US'; 22; be e. S'n (S5»"i) 73; do'e. V. exaltQ!l171P61el; be exalted Dili, except, V. beside, eye T!? f. 29. face D-^iS 31a. fall ^B3 67; f. down (in adoration irpoaxuvsTv) nniu VII, 74jt>s. false: render by genet, of Siffi, a f. witness SIB tS. falsehood KIlC 29'c'; 1)5ia 28. famine, v. hunger, far pirri 23 ; be f. pm. father ax 38. favour ign 28. fear (verb) K"i; 76^'; (subst.) ns-i^ 35. feast, ifestival ISia 24e. few BSa. field ITi'ffl 316. fierce, w. anger. fight ciii>:. fill, fulfil' xia 75 I, genly. IH; f. with sthg. ace. 836. find XSa 75. finish TO3, pass. IT ; be finished nbs 74, DPI (dan) 73m. fire u3n 26. flee ma 65e, DM 71. flesh lira 25. flock IXS. fly EJW Polel 71. food Vaxa 24. fool bisa foot ^a'l '/■. 28. footstool d'^Vj^ dSn. for(oonj.)''3;(prep.)^;(=jjro)isa. 104* ENGLISH-HEBREW VOOABULAEV. foreskin nb"is 35. forget HDir 65. forgive nbd 65. form, to "is; 70. former )Wifr\. forsake 3tS 65. frail, f. man ffii:^. from ]'Q 44. fruit ^"iS m. 30c. fugitive Oi^S- fuiai, V. fill. ' full, be xba 75, ace. 836. garden "a 26. garment '153 28?-. gate 1S1U 28! gather ap^ I, 111; Pass. IV; g. together 7?|5. Gaza ln-13> /". get up, V. rise. Gibeon "isaa. give IW 67i. glad, be na'ttj (e), in, 3; iU^to 72. glorify "iSQ 65 ; g. one's self VII. glory Tins 23; (verb) bfennn seg. 3. go 'r^^n 68i, 64A; g. down 1^; 68/; g. forth, out XS^ 76^; g. round 230 73 ; g. up nbs 74. go, let (send awaj') ofeia. God din'bx (with preflf. v. 10c 4); godly T^bn 2?. gold 3nt 25. Gomorrha niaS. good 310; beg. 3b; 69; do g.V. grass Tiar! 23. grave "i3|? 28, c. suff. '3];. great bi^^ 23; be, become g. ^^S (e).' ground fialx 34i. Hagar "iSn. Hananiah iT'SDli. hand i; 24c. handmaid nh&B 35, rtaN 38. T : ■ ' T T happen h"ip 74. harden (heart) 133 V. harvest "i^Sfs 23. haste, in: render by 1!ia III, foUd. by finite Vb. w. 1, aco. to §84e. hate NiiZJ 75. head Bit'l 38. hear 5)aiU; make to h. V. hearken 3!a\lj, h. unto sthg. "bs, h. unto one's voice 'B ^ipa. heart 331= 25e, 3^ 26. T" J .. heaven D^am 38. heavy -OS 2bh. Hebrew i"i3S, f. ni-i3s. heed, take "laiu II, VII. herbage 3iUS 28. herd "153 25, coll. hero Tiss. Hezekiah lilJpTn. hide 'T'tlSsn, h. one's self inb 11, VII. high, he d!|1 71. hire ISto 25, niBira 36. holiness V'jp m. 28. holy lailp 28; be h. mp. ENSLISH-HEBREW VOOAEULART. 105* honour (Vb.) 133; {Suhst.) 1133 23. horn )~:p^ 28. horse bID. host Nas 25; Lord of Hosts hot, he h^n 74. house n";! 38. how no 16/! humhle 15^ 25. hunger as'i 25. husband li:"'iS; 38. Hushai "nain. idol bibK. if el dN, iav 13. imagination (thought) rviBtoa 376. in, into 3 45. incline (ear, heart) IriBD V, 76d. increase na^ 74. indeed: render by inf. abs. of aocompg. Verb, v. §63i. inheritance M^n?- innocent "^pj 31a. instruct nii'v, 76/'. Israel bN'nilJ':. Jacob 3'pS\ Jahweh TTU'' 96. Jebusite "iSttX Jehoshaphat asiaifi". Jehu Stiin.''. Jephthah rtn^':. Jeremiah in;;??"i^ Jericho ih'^"!''. Jerusalem B^BI'i'^ 96. Job ai*N. Jonathan 'insiiT'. _' TT I : Joram D"i'i''. Jordan ')^"i;) c. artie. Joseph v|&i"'. Joshua SBJifTi. joy rinaia'35; toiiaa 23 (Ex, 40). Judah'irnillTi. judge MSB. judgement BBlUa 24. just pi'ns, keep ^a)!3 ; k. one's self II. kill J^n;'n!ia v, 71 i. u. kind nitJ. kindle nsi V, 70. king T^is 28. kingdom fis^oa 336, ntoba 37a. knee t^'na 28, know sW^ 68/. lad 1?_5 28i. lamp "15. land (country) y"1S f. 28, artic. 1 Id; (for cultivation) rtanx 346. large bflJ 23. law, go to BBia?, with -ns. leper S'lisa. lest 11 41, '4. lie (subst.) 313 25, Ipffl 28 ; (vb.) 313. lie, 1. down 33ia impf., a. life C|i*r:. lift up W^V,71 ; (the voice, eye) StiZJS 76e. 106* ENOLISH-HEBKEW VOCABULAKY. light, be ))p_ iV>p) 73. light up IIS V, 71. lightning pia 25. like 3. lion h.'^'itf;, i"iX 30 little "b;? 26d. live n'^n 76e. As the Lord liveth mni'iij 90i. lodge -p!? 72. long, how 1.? ina IS, mk is*. longer, no 1. "IIS . . Nb. longsuffering W^m 'r^'iK 25A. look 1325 V, 67 ; nx'1 74. lord Tins 23, bsa 28^ The Lord (Jahweh) mni 96; ■'pN, ^j-e^. 10c. loud (voice) bilJ. lying : render by a oiroumloou- tion with gen. of -ipm. Cf. false. maid, maiden niSJ 35. ' T-:i- make fWS 74 ; (a covenant) tt'nB. man la'iN 38, D'l!*; (mankind) Manasseh fliasa. many ST 2*^. 26 ; be, become m. a^ (331) 73. master to? 28. meal-offering rtllia 35. meet, to nxij:?. memory )T1S1 23d. merciful "iisri; be m. "in 73, ace. pers. mercy Ibn 28. messenger "sba 246. midst T^IB 29c; from the m. of 'rytPa seq, gen.; in our m. might nb; li» 26c. month irih 28. moon nil. morning "ijsia 28, Moses Iraa. mother DK 26. mountain "In 26. Artie. 26ce. mourn ISO. mouth fis 38. myriad n33"l 34. name B<23 24/". ^/. ni. near 31115 23; draw n. 31)5. neighbour ']3UJ 25/"; (companion) SI. Cf.: one. night n^'i^ m. no (ac?/) ib . . . xb. no one, none,nobody 'I'^e. genet. (part.) 41, 2. not xb; in prohibitions"^^ 41, 3. nought, come to (perish) 13N 66a ; bringto n. (one's counsel) 11B T, 73. now hFlS. numbe'r IB&a 24. numerous, v. many. of la 44; (bef. agent=by) >. offer (sacrifice) flbs V, 74. oil laiii. old 'IP J 25; be, become o. ']|31. olive m 29a. on -to 43a; 3. ENGLISH-HEBEBW VOCAECLARY. 107* one (single) iriK 39a; (each) one to the other sins^-'bK la"!!*. open flHB 65. oppress vri^ 65e. oppressor, enemy IS 26e. ornament !T|iSSn f. Z6g. orphan Din" 23. other (adj.) ^m; (prom.) see: one. out, out of la 44. outstretched, part. pass, of iiai l%d. over -Vs 43a. ox (young) IS 29ce. palace bsin 24. part pbn 28Z. . part (separate) b'^'n^fi ; {intrans.) pass, come to (of events foretold) Xia 76A; hring to p. SiS V. path ain; 23, nains 22. pay bfcis.' peace dibuJ 23. peculiar: a p. people rtfejp dS. people trj 26c£ Xao?; "iis 196 eSvo?. perceive "pa 72. perfect d^ffl 25/". perhaps 'i^'IN. perish lax 660. pervert (judgement) rti33 V, 76. Pharaoh iliS'lB. Philistine "iPiaJl?!?, pi. d^n; genly. ■without Artie, pilgrimage ClJO. pitch (tent) fIBJ 76d place (subst.) dipa 23, pi. m; («;6.) "Tiasn. plant SaS 67 e./. plead one's cause 'B a""") a^'i 72. pleasure I'Sri 28; take p. ysn 65^, in a. pollute SBB 75; p. one's self II, VII. poor ■p'^aN. portion pbll 28Z. possession, property ilfeap. Cf. : peculiar, pour, p. out 'r^Bia, pS'; 70. praise (vb.) hhn ; pass. IT; (swisf.) pray hisnti, to "ix, for ISS; I pray thee, you (dock) KJ. prayer fliSFi. precious, be 1p;|) 68e. preserve "lallj. priest "irt'a 24. prince N^toS 23a. prophesy MJ II, 76e. prophet Xia; 236, prove "na. pull down D^rt. pursue, ff]'i"J; p. after "''ins '"1. pursuer C)'i"i j70J"f. queen na^sa 35a. rain (subst.) laa 25; (vb. trans.) iiaart. ram b'^X 28. ransom ISis 28. 108* ENGLISH-HEBREW VOCABULAKY. rebuke n3i V; pass. 11, 68. recount ^BD. redeem bxa 65e. redeemer Vsta 24e. refuge n&na 31 ; take r. n&fl 75, in 3. ' ' refuse l^a 656. regard (look) aaa V, 67. regard (cestimare) aiBn. Kehoboam DSan'i. reign T|^a; T. rejoice b'^a 72. rejoicing n^^a. remember ^3t. remove (cbange one's dwelling place) SW 67/'; (put away) 1TO V; p"'n'in. •reproacli iia"in 35C.6. rest ™ 71. return 2TO 71. Reuben "laiX"). rich l^ia^ 23. riddle iTJTl 22. right (hand, side) "pa^ 23. righteous p'^'^.S. righteousness p^S 28a; SM^. '3. rise, r. up Wp 71 ; rise early river 'niiJ 256. rook ^!lS. rod aa>23 28, naa 31. roll ^^a 73. ' ' ruins TKl'^'n f. 35a. T t: ' rule blUo, over 3. Sabbath naiU /. S.-day 'liin Dii. safety, in Haab. saints Tipn 23 ;' Bill? 23 ^?. Samaria 'ji'iaia. Samson Tifflaffi. sanctuary lii'^pa 24a. satisfied, be sato (e) c. aee.\ satisfy V. Saul biixia. save SJaJi V, 68 ; bx> V, 67 ; B^a. say lax 66. Saying, "las]? lOc. scatter Y>1B V, 71. sea ill 26. season "isia 24e; ns 26. see ntfl 74. seed 2>^,t 28. seek UJpa 606. seer nxS, nih 31. sell ^3a; pass. II. send, 3. forth n^ffl 65, I, III; s. over nas 65 vl separate ^''^ari. serpent llJnS. servant ^sV 28i, laS 28. serve laS ace. ^ers. 83e. set (place) ftiifl 72; aisn 70; s. on fire ns^ V, 70. shadow h'S, 26. shame fiiua /".; be put to s. llJia 71«, 77'. sharp 'iWlB 23. shave (head) nka 65. shed 7]SUJ. shekel ^JpUJ 28. shepherd ns'l 31o. shield 'iJa 26 (^ unchangeable), shine 'niX 7li; make to s. V. EHQLISH-HEBKEW VOOABTJLAEY. 109* shoe bS3 28. short, he 1Sp5^. show nxn 74 V. shut ^mJ sickness "^Vn 30c. Sidon TIT'S? sigh nnjN 34. = TT -; signet-ring TSSa See. silence, keep ttji'^lllrt. silver C)D3 28r. sin fW »w. 23c, nstsn 36e. sin, to XBh 75, against b. since (prep.) 'ja; (co>»/.) tXp. single (one) IhX. sinners DiNBIl. sister ninx 38. sit 31^; 68/". slave TO 28. slay S^ii; (for sacrifice) DriB65. sleep 'i^p^ 68i. small "iMi? 26ii; be s. )bp^. smite n-i: V, 16d. snare IZJjJ'ia 24. Sodom D"lD. Solomon tlidbv. son "3 38. son-in-law inn 25. T T sorrow 'j'iJ'J 23. soul mi f. %s, pi. m. sow S^t 65. spare ^an 65, seq. "b? pers. speak "lan, lax 66. spear na'l 28. spirit ffl") ^. ^i^. m. spoil 113 73. spy ba'na 24. spy, spy out hV). staff naa 3i; aaia 28. stand las 65, 323 70; take one's s. 3!rnri. star 3313' 24. stead, instead nnpl 436. steal 33a; pass. IV. still TiS,' suif. iOf. stone 13« f. 28. stool, ?^. foot. stranger IJ. straw ']3t|1. strength lis* 26c. stretch forth (the hand) Tibili; inB3 76d (esp. of superior to inferior), strong pin 25. suck p^"^ 69a; give s. V. sun UJatt? m. and /". 28. swear 3>3ia3, by 3; make, cause to s. Y. swift b]5 {hbp) 73. sword 3"in 28. tabernacle "SlUa »«. 24. ta.ble, tablet (for writing) Tyk m, pi. m. take Upb eih; t. off (shoe &c.) VuJ3 67/. talk lafl. teach la'b; teacher, ^arf. tear (of beast of prey) C)^E3. tell (inform) 153 V, 67; (relate) tent ^nx 28. terrible Xlia no* BNGLISH-HEBBEW VOCABDLAKT. testimony (law) niV f. ila. than (compar.) 'fo 826. that (adj.) tHinrt no; (conj.) ^S; that . . . not ']Q 41, 4. then: in Bxx. often used for 'and' to suggest employment of 1 consec. there bV; there is, was: see 'be', thigh 'TIS; 25e. things (events) D'^'13'^. this nj 16a. thought na^una 33. threshing floor '"la 28p. throne KB3 Sid. thus n's. till (prep.) IS. till, to 13S. timens) 26 ; (=Germ.mal, Fr.fois) D?Q f. 28. Twice, two times to-day 'm^n 17a. to-morrow ini2. tongue Tim^ /. 23. tooth )^ 26. touch ^'55 67 e./. transgression I'lUB 28. transgressor SUJa 24e. tree yv 24 /■. (also eoZ/.) tribe WSHi 28. trumpet ^siiz: m. 24, pi. m. trust naa 65, in 3. tumult "lion 23. turn back aum 71. twice, V. time. under nnn 43J. understand 'p^ 72; have, get understanding "iS ; b'^Stort (Ex. 46). unpunished, leave npJ III; remain u. 11, 76d. unto b 46, "ix 43a; (MSjMe ad) IS 43a. upon "by 430. upright lia; 25. Uriah n^"iW. vain, in XTOb (Ex. 44). vengeance na]35 34. venison T)S 29. verily: render by Inf. Abs. bef. finite Verb, Gid. vessel ■'IpSi 38. vineyard D")? 28. virgin n^ina 22. vision iTina 31. voice bip w. vow Ti.i, '3, e. SM^. '3 28w. wages, V. hire. wake up 'j'pi 69a, 77. walk r^rtnn 22. wall irain. wander SI J 71. want, to 10(1 65^, c. ^iee. 835. war nanba 36^ ; man of w. 'a 12;iS«. wash yni 65. watch laaj. water, waters ti";a 38. water, to (give to drink) nplli V, 74, 77. way ""ITl 28. ENGTJSH-HEBREW VOCABULAKY. Ill* ■weak flBT 31b. weary one's selfjbe weary "5^ 68d. weep risa 74. ^weight ^15iaa 24. well, do aai 69 V. what? Ha 16 e, /". 45e6. where Q\2J...1UJN; where? n;^X, swyf. 4V. wherefore, why fiB? 45e6. whether (in anindirect question) !i 42fl; whether . .. or DS...!l 4'2i. who, which ll^S 87. who? "la 16e. whole iis 26. wicked SlIJI 25, 31 26. wickedness, do wickedly, v. evil, wild ox DKI. wilderness laia 24. willing, he naif 66a, seq.hc.Inf. 84cZ. wine ']'^? 29. wise, on this: !). saying. wise (man) DDn 25; be dsn 65. witness IS 22. with W iSd, nx 43c. within (prep.) ai]? w. within me ""aipa. Of. : midst, wood ys 2if,pl. pieces of wood; (forest) "IS? 28. word la'^ 25; IBS 28o. work nisa, hvh 28. wound S3Q 28 ; Suff. 'B. write ans. Tear rtSlU /■. 33, pi. Q'' . youth B'l'isa 22. Zion ')i*3/'. APPENDIX. Explanatory Notes on Gen. 1 — 3. I. 1. n-^aJS^ f. beginning. || 2. r\rt^ri Til. II sinin 30i wasteness, ■waste. II Vvi emptiness, 1 460 4. || diilFl tumult of waters, the deep. || Cin"lIIIliover(ofbirdhoveringoveritsyoungDeut.32,ll). || 3."ial!<'»1 66a3. II W 766. II 4.N'i?l 74j3. | 5. lixb 17e. || S'lfJ 13a8. 6. •r\^T^ 29c. II in-'i 11^2. || Dia^is/p. || 7. to?li 74oe. || 'b bsa above. || 9. >l15':74m. || ln«'ini74Ma. Sereunder ns.65&I. || 10. dia? pi. not numerical but to indicate extent: "expanse of sea", "ocean". || iiaJa;^ the dry land (terra firma). II. Xlli^ verdure, grass; NlU'n become green, spring up, V causat. II Sli V produce seed; S"''ilB'65fi. || tiuis 74^^. || ia i:)-!! laJX 87a. II yixn-^S) to be joined with I'-iXfi xujin. || 12. NSiFlV 765''. |'| !iroia> 22i|3. II 14. n'lxa ifi-; 86/. || Wl. Waw cons. 64c. || Di-isio fixed, stated times, seasons. || bia'; 38. || 15. "I'^Sill? 71. 16. 1.3^396. II tJilpSan 17A. ll'^Han 82c. || ib;{ small. |l 17. ^m 67t, posuit. il bi^anV-i (e(i. Baer) 5d. || 20. ')''ni?j to move in amass, swarm. ■j'"ia! swarm, mass (esp. of the lower forms of animal life), ace. 836. 1' CjiS coll. birds.. |1 CjaiS': 7l6. 21. •]"'|n sea-monster, whale, -/^TOi;. || il*rin, fern, of "^ri. || TiJS 87e (ace. depending on !lS"lia 836). || 6!ira^ 22A:|3. || 6)33 PjW winged birds. || 22. Ti"ia"'5 6561. 64/^. || laxb 650.' || IIE) 74m." || D'n'i 74oY. II 24. ssin ve^'. 'fba-ii 46a4. || in-im 20cp. 26. niB5>3 74y. II !i^^-;l74'm. || -bsM, after this word n^n appears to have dropped out. || 27. "ist mas, masculus. || n2|5J female, oppos. ^=1. II 28. fjtU33i. 79rC' if 29. "'Sin; 67i; perf. 476. || is— iffls 876. II Vjl 2Sg. II nb=k food. || 30. After n^n uJSi supply Tjnj.ii 31. iffllBJl Article sometimes with the adj. only (e. ff. 41, 26) esp. with ordinal numbers. II. 1. ll^D-il 64/". 74m. II 2. b?";! 74S. || MtoS niTK 876. 1| naffl rest. II 3. niiasV 74^-, '^ 45e|3. masV x^a, unioii" of two verbs to 113* express a single idea (§84): wh. he had made as Creator, cf.Ewald §285a. II 4. nflWri (oiAy plur. constr.) generations; hence family history, history. |1 Q^'aiUI y^iA ace., depending on nito?. || 5. tp'^ plant. II Ml)!!'; S'lD "was not yet". 'B is usually joined with the Irapf. (47c), even where the reference is to the past, since it contains in itself the idea of incompleteness: 19, 4. 24, 45; in the same way dnaa 37, i8. || lasb 65w. 6. IS mist. II li^5>^ liga.p. Addend, to 47c. The Impf. is also employed to denote such events as happen frequently, and to in- dicate "use and wont", or continually recurring actions: G 29, 2 >;pffl^ "they were wont to water''; hence, too, when the reference is to lasting events in the sphere of the past: rtbs'' 1X1 "but a mist went up continually"; G 2, 10 1^S\ || 7. 1X1*1 70. |1 IBS. The material of which any th. is made appears usually in the Ace. : cf. 1 Kgs. 18, 32. I ns^l 67. || 8. S-'a^l 67. || "it!? «• P^- II '^lij'? iifiy-: "from the Bast", i. e. Eastwards, in the B. (of. Fr. s'approoher de qu.)- II t^to*!! 72. 11 9. nas^i! 65sp. II Ian? est. || Di*nn y? 17^. || nsii esf. II I'll ai-j ace. 55b note. |1 rii 46a4. II 10. nipianb 74k. 1| iib-; zj. to V. 6. II nini Waw cons. || ditUNI 38, "beginnings" (viz: of streams). 11. aabn predicate. || 'iTOiS and flbiin nomm. pr.; so v. 13 lirr^S, ffite; V. 14 ^pin Tigris, 1fim Assyria, tTnisBuphrates. || QtU— im 87&. II 12. 3!tj^ 5d. II Xinn 95. II rt4a Bdellium (an aromatic resin- ous substance). || dtliii Onyx?, Beryli?. |1 14. n?-lp (only st. c.) in front of, before. || niB Xiin 85c*. || 15. HI?';! 67/i. || iinris:»5 71y. || Siay^ 55e; suffix, objecti 78a; 'ja here fern. " ' ' 16. IS'^l 74S. II bbSt 63(Z. II iaxh 66a2. II 17. 13232 446. || T;>38< 556.660. II n'ia(7ii). 63i^ II 18. n'i"'ri766. |I m^,28k. |i 19. is^wo.H sa^i 76/i. II nix-i^ 74fc. || ioia 24/". |j iw ssa 1368. 21. bB?1 67a. II nal^n deep sleep! 1| liz^^l 6Sd. || ITO^aa 25«. || nsnnn 436. '|| 22. la^i noY. || nxa-ji 76^; "suff. i9f2. f 23. ossn 17a. '|[ nrip^ (ed. Baer), p. 606. l] '24. l?"^? for this reason, there- fore. II paii^irtiWawcons. || inma38. I 25. diBiis 26d. II iiOTan'; 77 (^ 62^7). ^III. 1. lo dins 826a; 'S wise, cunning. || tix really; tlN=!:|i2^41,5r|| -b=N65o. |' 12. nnni'67?. || ^■]B5>43d. II 13. ns^rna 42^. || n^to 74ea. YiJNiiari 76e; dni79e. \\ 14. ^S be- cause. II "l^Sa; ']a here particularises : of all the beasts thou art the one on which the curse falls. || ^^)sPl 68j. || '^a'^ 38. || 15. tia'^K en- mity.. II nim 72d. II ?]S!iiu': 71. II ^{r\ itiw ssi. || wwt\ soa. 16. na'in 74io8. || na-lS 74^a. || lilh Sir. Xe^. conception. II I'l^n, 68/. II 17. Iiasa on account of, for (thy) sake. || nS^sStth 80a; 3 : when followed by 3 demonstr. with suff. the 3 of ^SSt receives Chateph-Pathaoh instead of SVa. || 18. I^'ll thorns. || riiaSft,Subj. the earth. || Tji 45c. || rtsNI Waw cons. '64c. j) 19. fiSl sweat. || ^3sn 13a8. Ij ?|=Vfl 71. II hPit 'l4c. II 20. mn i. e. Life. 21.rii3n3 36/". || lisskin. II DiaaVy79e. || 22.nm32i5'. | nsnV 45/'a. II np^l/'W'aw cons. 64c. || iffl 76c; 1.46a4. |1 23. n30 here: drive out. 1| 'd;Ba . . im 87n. || 24. Ii3'i5'^1 6il^. 656l. |1 D'i|3a see on G 2, 8. II an? flame. || 'Tjlil VII to turn in every direction. || laiD'b 55(;. II di^nri ys •rjpr} 2lf/ Explanatory Notes on Pss. 1 — 3. I. 1. On the Perfects v. 1 (Tj^n &c.), the Impf. (nan;;) v. 2 s.47d. II nasas. nss. || ts^sa-i without'artic. 17^2. II nixari'^i. fawi. sinners. || 2ira consessus. || 2. DS ^3 but (after a negative). Q iian meditate. || nbi?! 46a4. || 3. fv^m, Waw cons. 64a. || bn;2j (poet.) plant. II ba; wither, impf. ba\ \\ 4. 'j'a chaff. || 5)^3, 67, 'scatter, 13 80a. II 6. lax'n 66a. 115* II. 1. uiS^ raise a tumult, rage. || p'^'\ vanity. || 2. W3?n'^ still depending on 'nvb. [\ '([h only in poetry; prince. || iliwa 68c; To"^ to found, II here: crowd together, assemble. |1 in;; together. | 3. pnj hreak off. III break in pieces. || fiinoio, B'^'ibia (pi. tant.) vincula ; auff. 22A;a. || nhs cord. | 4. pTW laugh. | SsVmock, \ pers. || ia^ 45c. II 5. IK then. | 'ia''^X 43a. || Tilh wrath, fierce anger. || iablna'i 790. II 6. "B; here : establish, install (of. ps; 70). || imj3-^r| "My holy mt." When the adj. is periphrastically expressed by the genet, of the corresponding aubst. the possessive pron. {suif. nom.) is appended to the latter; cf. Isa. 2, 20. 7. -bi< concerning, de, cf. ^ 69, 27. || hm 14c. || Bi^h 17a. || ?|iFll'b'i, I to be explained ace. to ll/l. || 8. nSFlSt-l 67«. || DSX prop, cessation, hence: end. || 9. SSI, impf. 2li, 73 break, dash in pieces, jj ^I'la iron. II ysi I and III dash in pieces, shiver. || 10. D'^b^a Vocative. || illbin 68; "ift"! 11 tolerative: let one's self be admonished, 49e. II 11. 'in-ns 83e. || ms-i trembling. || 12. la-lplB? prob.: act with sincerity, uprightly; of. G 41, 40. p'&i T^'B'h'SX Others: kiss ye the son (13 Aram.=son, Prov. 31, 2). || T^l'? ace. of nearer de- finition. "n=fortune, fate. || Isa to burn (-ans.); also, as here, kindle (intr.). || BSa3 c. impf. to indicate something that might easily happen. || ia ^Din 21^'. III. 1. ITl^belonging to him=oomposed by him (boMciorts). II 2. 131 7351. II B"'a|3 71. II 3. ^IZi&iV; \ in regard to, concerning, de, Q 20,13; cf. "Vx '1' 2,7. II fin-jsiaj";, n^accus. ending, now meaning- less as in fib''^ 20c. || b'^ii'^NS 10c4. || n^b a musical term, perhaps: forte. II 4. is'a. suff. ■'isa &c., round about. || D^la 71w.'l| 5. "^hV ace. instr. \\ xipX I call, ild. || ''iiS^I and he answers (83e), hears me. Waw cons, characterises the hearing as the result of the prayer. |1 I!ia44a"c. || 6. ln5EiW64i | inis''pn77; 'pii7lo. || ''?=??5?': impf., because the reason is a permanent one. |{ 7. XI'^N 76^'. || niaal 5d. \\ nw 72d. \\ rC'lU here without obj.=take up a position, "have arrayed themselves". |1 8. naiip 71ep. || "'SS'^ttJ'iri 68. |i n"'3n 76d. II -^n^. 83t. II F!l3a? 60f \\ 9. rijrn;b 9&. || ?in3la, supply "^flt^ or sap, cf. 89e. " , ^. = pausal form. Printed by W. Drugulin, Leipzig. H. Reuther, Publisher, Berlin S.W. ARABIC GRAMMAR WITH PARADIGMS, LITERATURE, CHRESTOMATHY AND GLOSSARY BV DR- A. S O C I N , PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF TUBINGEN. 80. XVI. 294 p. cloth 7 s. 6d. Opinions and Reviews, The need of a brief handbook for elementary instruction in Arabic has long been felt in Englan d, since the vast amount of matter contained in Prof. Wright's excellent grammar is apt to frighten rather than to encourage a beginner in this difficult branch of linguistic studies. Dr. Socin of Tubingen, therefore, deserves the sincere thanks of all engaged in Arabic tuition in this country for having recast into a new and more acceptable form th e late Prof. Petermann's "Brevis linguae arabicae grammatica" which forms the 4* part of the well-known series of introductory oriental grammars styled "Porta linguarum orientalium." — — Quite a novel feature is the addition of a series of well-chosen English sentences for translation into Arabic, which will be welcome to Indian Civil Service candidates at least as a stepping-stone to Arabic composition on a larger scale. The general outlines of the grammar have been preserved, but the hand of a judicious reviser is visible almost on every page room has been made for a short chapter on syntax, which gives, in the narrow space of 22 pages a clear and intelligible account of Arabic tenses, the govemement of verb and noun, and simple and compound sentences. This will no doubt be highly appreciated by the student, and assist him ' in mastering the contents of such standard grammars as Wright's, Caspari's or De Sacy's. Athenaeum March 19. 86. The Grammar is very definite and perspicuous in its statements, and nicely accurate, containing only what i! necessary for a beginner, with scarcely any repetitions, though well supplied with illustrative examples. — — The bibliography is well London: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, Covent Garden. New Yo^rk: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 383 Broadway. H. Reuther, Publisher, Berlin S.V^. selected. The chrestomathy is well arranged for a beginner, and the glossary is likewise well done. — The excellence of this work is that when it is mastered, which is easy to a faithful student, the foundation is laid for rapid and securef: advance to froficien(y in Arabic. Prof. Socin has a speaking acquaintance '| with the language, and has avoided the minor inaccuracies that frequently beset the closet-scholar. Independent June, 25. 1885. Hebrew Grammar with Reading book, Exercises, Literature and Vocabularies by Hermann L. Struck, D. D., Ph. D. Professor of Theology in Berlin. HEBREW GRAMMAR WITH EXERCISES LITERATDRE AND VOCABULARY by Hermann L. Strack. Translated from the German by Archd. R. S. Kennedy. Second enlarged edition. 8. XVI. 264 p. cloth 5 s. GRAMMAIRE HfiBRAIQUE AVEC PARADIGMES, EXERCICES DE LECTDRE, CHRESTOMATHIE ET INDICE BIBLIOGRAPHIQDE par Herm. L. Strack. Traduit de I'allemand par Ant. F. Baumgartner. Edition revue et augment^e parl'auteur. 80. XII, 250 p. sewed %\(>d. Opinions and Reviews. Le Muslon, Janvier 1886: La grammaire h^braique de Mr. .Strack, sp^cialement dans la seconde Edition, m^rite S!etre qualifiie d'excellente; elle donne ce (ju'un livre de classe doit fournir pour meriter cette qualification . . . C'est surtout dans Texpos^ du verbe que I'auteur t^moigne d'une connaissance magistrale et d'une methode scientifique, unie a un systeme pratique excellent . . . Rev. Prof. Aiken (Princeton) in: The Presbyterian Review, July 1886. This little book will be found useful even by advanced Hebrew scholars. The American 1886, No. 290: It is yet the best Hebrew Grammar for teaching purposes which has thus far appeared. London: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, Covent Garden. New York: B. WESTERMANN & Co. 383 Broadway. H. Reuther, Publisher, Berlin S.W. The Guardian 1886, Aug. 25: A work which has a high reputation in Germany. It is "the result of many years' experience" in practical teaching. Rev. Vxo'i. Kirkpatrick (Cambridge) in: The Expositor, June 1886: Prof. Strack's name is a guarantee of accurate and careful work. Rev. Ck. H. H. Wright (Dublin) in : Irish Ecclesiastical Gazette, July 1886 : A most valuable synopsis of Hebrew Grammar . . . The syntax is peculiarly satisfactory. Prof. Will. Harper (Yale College) in: Beiraica, January 1886: In this work, Dr. Strack has given an indication of the Hebrew learning for which he is so well known, not only in Europe, but also in America. But more than this, he has indicated his ability as a practical teacher. The book is fresh, vigourous, scientific. Tix.' Landauer (Strasbourg) in: Deutsche Litteraturzeitung 1886, No. 13, „Hier erkennt man in jedem Paragraphen, dass man es mit einem tiichtig geschulten Hebraisten zu thun hat, imd es ware im Interesse der Theologie- Studierenden lebhaft zu wunschen, dass das Buch auf den Gymnasien allgemein emgefiihrt wUrde." Prof. S. R. Driver (Oxford) in: The Academy, Dec. 1883 [l^e £dit.]: The work is an eminently practical one and bears traces throughout of the in- dependent lab.our, which has been bestowed upon it. Prof. Kautzsch (Tiibingen) in : Theologische Literaturzeitung 1884, No. 2 : „Uberall gibt sich grundliche Vertrautheit mit dem Stoff und reichliche pada- gogische Erfahrung kund." Prof. A. Kolbe in: Theologisches Literaturblatt 1883, No. 38: „Schon der Name des Verfassers lasst etwas Gediegenes erwarten, zumal wissenschaftliche Selbstandigkeit, ausgebreitete Gelehrsarakeit und praktische Erfahrung sich bei ihm in gliicklichster Weise vereinigen. Dieser Erwartung entspricht die vorliegende Leistung." Paradigms to the Hebrew Grammar by Herm. L. Strack. 8°. 22 p. td. LITTERATURA SYRIACA without the Syriac Grammar by D"' Eberh. Nestle. 80. IV. 65 p. M. 2.—. London: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, Covent Garden. New York: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 383 Broadway. H. Reuther, Publisher Berlin S.W. Just issued : SY.RIAC GRAMMAR with Bibliography, Chrestomathy and Glossary by Dr. Eberhard Nestle. Translated from the second German edition by Arch"*- R. S. Kennedy, B. D. So. XVI. 26/ p. cloth 8 s. 6 d. It is an admirable little work, the best probably for beginners, as it contains a short but complete grammar, a reading specimen with analysis, a survey of Syriac literature, a, Chrestomathy consisting of the first four chapters of Genesis, and a Glossary containing all the words occurring in the Chrestomathy, and explaining all the diffcult forms. Triibners Record. L'^diteur ua refait la grammaire de fond en comble et il I'a raise au courant des travaux qui ont paru sur ce sujet depuis l88r. EUe comprend non seulement las Elements n^cessaires a I'^tude de la langue, mais aussi un r^sum^ de I'histoire de la grammaire syriaque. La syntaxe, exclue de la premiere Edition, occupe quelques pages, etc. etc.a R. Duval. Dass Nestle's Grammatik praktisch ist, beweist der Umstand, dass eine Neuauflage nothig geworden ist. Sie wird sich in dem neuen Gewande noch grosserer Gunst zu erfreuen haben. Prof. Fried. Baethgen, London: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Street, Covent Garden. New York: B. WESTERMANN & Co., 383 Broadway. H. Reuther, Verlagsbuchhandlung in Berlin S.W. Keilinscliriftlich.e Bibliothek: Sammlung von assyrischen und babylonischen Texten in Umschrift und tJbersetzung. In Verljindung mit Dr. L. Abel, Dr. 0. Bezold, Dr. P. Jensen, Dr. F. E. Peiser, Dr. H. Winckler Eberhard Schrader. Das vorstehende Untemehmen ist dazu bestimmt, die seit einer fieihe von Jabren im Bereicbe des alten Assyrien und Babylonien gemaobten Insohriftenfimde in einer ©hronologiscb und zugleicb sacblicb geordneten Sammlung in ihren wichtig- sten Keprasentanten zu vereinigen und in transoribirtem Text mit gegenuber stebender deutscher tJbersetzung vorzulegen "Wird die Wiedergabe des transcribirten Originaltextes den An- forderungen strenger Wis sens oh aft Geniige zu leisten bestrebt sein, so wird die beigefiigte wortgetreue tJbersetzung die fur die Gresobichte so hoohwicbtigen Inscbriftenfunde auch den nicht assyrologisoh vorgebildeten Lesern, in erster Linie Historikern und Theologen, aber auch Juristen und Alterthumsfreunden im weitesten Sinne des Worts zuganglioh zu machen sucben. Durch sorgfaltige Uterarische Naobweise und die Beifugung sacblieher und sprachlicher Erlau- terungen in knappester Form ist fiir die Orientirung des Lesers auf dem betreffenden Gebiete in entsprecbender Weise gesorgt. Beziiglioh der bei Auswahl, Transcription und TJbersetzung im Einzebien befolgten Grundsatze verweisen wir auf das Vorwort. Das Zusammenwirken einer Eeihe von fachmannischen Gelehrten, an deren Spitze Prof. Dr. Eberh. Schrader in Berlin steht, diirfte dem Werke eine dauemde Bedeutung sichern. Der erschienene I. Band (XVI, 218 S. gr. 8. Mit 1 Karte M. 9. — ) umfasst die historisohen Texte des alt-assy- rischen Eeichs nebst chronologischen Beigaben. Band II der keilinschriftlichen Bibliothek, welcher _zum Herbst 1889 erscheinen wird, bringt in TJmschrift und IJbersetzung, sowie mit den notigen einleitenden Bemerkungen und sonstigen Erlauterungen verseben, ausgewahlte Inschriften: Tiglath-Pileser's II. (III.); Sargon's II.; Sanherib's ; Asarhaddon's ; Asurbanipal's; femer InschriHten aus der Zcit der Ausgange des assyrischen Reichs; Die babylonische Chronik betr. die Zeit seit dem Re- gierungsantrltte Tiglath-Pileser's II. (III.) ; Den babylonisehen Regenten-Kanon ; Den Kanon des Ptolemaus; dazu: eine Iiistorische Karte des neu-assyrischen Reichs von 745 V. Chr. bis znm Falle Ninivehs. Die ganze Sammlung ist auf vier, in jahrlichen Zwiscben- raumen erscheinende Bande im TJmfange von je ca. 15 Bogen bemessen, jedem Bande historisohen Inhalts wird eine erlau- ternde Karte von Prof. H. Kiep ert beigegeben sein. Der Preis eines jeden Bandes wird M. 9. — nicht iibersteigen. Indem wir zur Subscription auf die Keilinschriftliche Bibliothek hiermit ergebenst einladen, bemerken wir, dass jede solide Buchhandlung in der Lage ist, den erschienenen I. Band auf Verlangen zur Einsicht vorzulegen. Berlin, Ostern 1889. H. Reuther's Verlagsbuchhandlung. London: WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14 Henrietta Str., Covent Garden. New York: B. WESTERMANN & Co. 383 Broadway.